俱舍論 心要連讀Abhidharmakośabhāṣya · Continuous Heart-Essence
序分·明諸法體Preface and the Nature of Dharmas
全文五層 →Full five layers →全論之門。歸敬立宗、自解「對法藏」之名,而後以一個判準(漏之隨增)總判一切法,立蘊處界三科——七十五法的底圖、也是往後唯識問題意識的萌芽處。
一句話:一切法先分有漏無漏、再攝入蘊處界三科——分類不是目的,「擇法」才是:離擇法,定無滅惑之餘方便。
來歷(先立)
世親講《毘婆沙》,一日一偈,積成六百頌;應罽賓之請作長行自釋,「立薩婆多義隨有僻處以經部義破之」——依有部而破以經量,一句傳記道盡全論性格。印度學徒號為「聰明論」(圓暉:如毒門之毒、開少慧門而遍入,故名慧毒門)。漢傳二譯:真諦《釋論》二十二卷(第一譯)、玄奘三十卷(永徽二年至五年·第二譯)——本編依玄奘,真諦為對勘。
三個眼目
-
禮讚即宗旨。歸敬頌從「滅冥」讚佛:染污無知盡是斷德、不染無知盡是智德——此論心中的佛,是『把一切不明白滅盡』的如理師。而「傳佛說對法」一個「傳」字,眾賢即讀作論主不信對法為佛所說而反責之:「經主稱傳,顯已不信阿毘達磨是佛所說」;唐疏同此讀(法寶「言傳說者,顯己不信」)。此讀出於古德,論文自身未作此釋——讀俱舍第一課:留意論主用字的溫度(傳說·有說·有餘師說)。
-
一個判準總判一切法。有漏無漏之分,不在善惡而在「隨增」:煩惱能於其中扎根增長者為有漏;滅道二諦可為惑所緣而惑不隨增,故無漏。此判準本身歷經百年錘鍊(法勝「生」→法救改「隨增」)。三無為中,非擇滅尤堪玩味:不由簡擇、只因緣缺而得的永不生——存在的地圖上有一類『因錯過而永滅』之法。
-
三科是三種切法,也是教育學。蘊=聚、處=生長門、界=種族;愚(心所/色/色心)、根(利中鈍)、樂(略中廣)各三,故說三門。受想別立為蘊,因為它們是「諍根、生死因」——目錄編排裡寫著病根診斷。而「如聚,蘊定假有」一句,是末品破我的遠伏線。
一義(附):意界的安排
十八界中的「意」不是第七個心——「由即六識身,無間滅為意」:前念纔滅,即名為意,為第六識作依。有部以此免立常存心體;唯識後來於同一問題立末那、阿賴耶。同一問題、兩代答案——讀唯識所以要回讀俱舍。
通於全論
「能持自相故名為法」——法之定義,此後百法唯識承用不改。三無為→六無為、色十一→百法色法、六識意界→八識:界品是七十五法的門面,也是世親轉入唯識前,問題意識成形之地。
The gateway to the whole treatise. It pays homage and sets out its thesis, explains for itself the name Treasury of Abhidharma, and then classifies all dharmas at a single stroke by one criterion (increase of the outflows by attachment), establishing the three classifications of aggregates, sense fields, and elements—the underlying map of the seventy-five dharmas, and the seedbed in which the questions later taken up by Yogācāra first stirred.
In one sentence: all dharmas are first divided into those with and those without outflows, then gathered into the three classifications of aggregates, sense fields, and elements—yet classification is not the aim, the discernment of dharmas is: apart from the discernment of dharmas there is certainly no other excellent means for extinguishing the defilements.
Provenance (Set Out First)
Vasubandhu lectured on the Mahāvibhāṣā, composing one stanza for each day’s teaching until six hundred stanzas had accumulated. At the request of Kashmir he wrote a prose self-commentary in which he established the Sarvāstivāda positions and, wherever a point was skewed, broke it with Sautrāntika doctrine—upholding the Sarvāstivādins while breaking them by the Sautrāntika measure. One line of biography states the character of the entire treatise. Students in India named it the Treatise of Intelligence (Yuanhui: like the small opening through which poison enters and then travels everywhere, this treatise opens only a narrow gate of discernment and yet gives entry to the whole; hence the name, the poison-gate of discernment). Two Chinese translations exist: Paramārtha’s Expository Treatise in twenty-two fascicles (the first) and Xuanzang’s in thirty fascicles (Yonghui years two through five, the second). This edition follows Xuanzang and uses Paramārtha for collation.
Three Points to Watch
-
The homage is itself the thesis. The stanza of homage praises the Buddha for the extinction of darkness: the exhaustion of defiled not-knowing is the virtue of abandonment, the exhaustion of undefiled not-knowing is the virtue of wisdom. The Buddha this treatise has before it is the teacher of things as they are, the one who has extinguished everything that was not understood. And in the phrase it is transmitted that the Buddha spoke the Abhidharma, the single word transmitted was read by Saṅghabhadra as an admission, and thrown back at its author: in saying “transmitted,” the Sūtra-master shows that he does not himself believe the Abhidharma to be the Buddha’s word. The Tang commentaries read it the same way (Fabao: by saying “it is transmitted,” he displays his own disbelief). This reading comes from the ancient masters; the treatise itself gives no such explanation. The first lesson in reading the Kośa: attend to the temperature of the author’s wording—it is transmitted, some say, some other masters say.
-
A single criterion classifies all dharmas. The division between with and without outflows rests not on wholesome and unwholesome but on increase by attachment: whatever the afflictions can take root and grow upon is with outflows. The truths of cessation and of the path can be taken as objects by the afflictions, yet the afflictions do not increase by attachment to them, and so they are without outflows. This criterion was itself hammered out over a century (Fasheng’s arising, emended by Dharmatrāta to increase by attachment). Among the three unconditioned dharmas, cessation independent of discernment repays attention most: a never-arising obtained without any act of discernment, simply because a condition was absent—on the map of what exists there is a class of dharmas forever extinguished because they were missed.
-
The three classifications are three ways of cutting, and also a pedagogy. Aggregate means collection, sense field means gate of arising, element means lineage; folly is threefold (about mental factors, about form, about form and mind together), the faculties are threefold (sharp, middling, dull), and preference is threefold (for brief, middling, or extended wording)—hence three gates of teaching. Feeling and perception are set up as separate aggregates because they are the roots of dispute and the causes of birth and death: the diagnosis of an illness is written into the very arrangement of the table of contents. And the sentence that an aggregate, being like a collection, is definitively provisional lays the distant groundwork for the refutation of self in the last chapter.
A Single Point (Appended): The Placement of the Mind Element
Among the eighteen elements, mind is not a seventh consciousness—it is precisely the six bodies of consciousness that, in ceasing without interval, become mind: the thought just ceased is thereby named mind and serves as the support of the sixth consciousness. By this the Sarvāstivādins avoid positing an abiding mental entity; Yogācāra later answered the same question by positing the defiled mind and the storehouse consciousness. One question, two generations of answers—which is why reading Yogācāra sends one back to the Kośa.
Bearing on the Whole Treatise
Because it maintains its own intrinsic mark it is called a dharma—this definition of dharma was carried on unchanged by the later hundred-dharma Yogācāra learning. Three unconditioned dharmas became six; the eleven kinds of form became the eleven forms of the hundred dharmas; six consciousnesses plus the mind element became eight consciousnesses. The Chapter on the Elements is the façade of the seventy-five dharmas, and the place where, before Vasubandhu turned toward Yogācāra, his sense of the problem took shape.
諸門分別·結Distinctions through the Several Gates · Conclusion
全文五層 →Full five layers →界品後半:二十二門逐一分別十八界——阿毘達磨方法論的展示廳,也是「眼見識見」千年之諍的現場。
一句話:拿二十二個問題把十八界問到見底——而在『誰在看』這一問上,論主以「傳說」二字存疑、讓經部說出『唯法因果,實無作用』——破執之問於此已然開口。
三個眼目
-
二十二門=把每一法放到所有維度上過篩。有見有對、三性界繫、尋伺分別、執受五類、同分三斷……在界上問(界具顯根境識),蘊處之義連帶而成。要學的不是答案清單,是這個問法本身。細針處:尋自身是「無尋唯伺」、欲界初靜慮之伺自身是「無伺唯尋」(中間靜慮之伺則同非相應法,是「無尋無伺」;分類法在自己身上不打折);法界恆同分——無一法永遠不被心觀照(聖者無我觀前後二念遍緣一切)。
-
眼見識見諍:從實體之問到用語之判。四家計(眼見·識見·慧見·和合見)往復攻防,論主頌中「傳說不能觀」二字存疑——眾賢讀出「經主意不忍彼因」,普光判「論主意朋識見」,法寶唯科文,圓暉以經部收結。經部一段收束全局:眼色緣生眼識,孰為能所?『唯法因果,實無作用』,眼能見識能了皆隨順世情之假名,「智者於中不應封著」。後來大乘破我法二執之論式,可與此對讀。
-
極微不相觸,但由無間假立觸名。毘婆沙立「無間生」義(相擊出聲而不相糅、風界攝持而不散);論主於法救「假立觸名」語下著評「此大德意應可愛樂」——連這句讚語眾賢也起而究詰。傍論之世界(二眼俱見·至不至境·根極微形狀·識依二世·四事地)皆此類:問到物理的盡頭,答案總在「假立」與「實有」之間。
一義(附):識名隨根
識何以名眼識不名色識?「隨根變識異」——識隨根之明昧而轉、不隨境變,且根不共(此眼唯發此識)而境共(一色人人可見)。所依勝、不共故,隨根立名。
通於全論
「審慮為先決度名見」之見義、三分別(自性·計度·隨念)架構、同分之界類義——皆後出法相之學的原座標。界品全品至此收卷:前半立體(三科攝法)、後半致用(諸門過篩);下一品「根」,將把二十二根與五位七十五法全幅展開。
The second half of the Chapter on the Elements: twenty-two gates distinguish the eighteen elements one by one—the showroom of Abhidharma method, and the site of the thousand-year dispute over whether the eye sees or consciousness sees.
In one sentence: twenty-two questions are put to the eighteen elements until they are seen through to the bottom—and on the question of who it is that sees, the author holds his distance with the words it is transmitted and lets the Sautrāntikas say that there are only dharmas as cause and result, with no agent function at all: here the question that breaks attachment has already opened its mouth.
Three Points to Watch
-
Twenty-two gates = putting every dharma through the sieve on every dimension. Visible and resistant, the three ethical qualities and realm affiliation, applied and sustained thought and discrimination, appropriation and the five classes, participating and the three abandonings . . . the questions are put on the elements (which display faculty, object, and consciousness together), and the senses of aggregate and sense field follow along. What is to be learned is not the list of answers but this way of asking. A fine needle-point: applied thought itself is “without applied thought and with sustained thought only,” and the sustained thought of the realm of desire and the first meditative absorption is itself “without sustained thought and with applied thought only” (while the sustained thought of the intermediate absorption goes with the unassociated dharmas as “without applied and without sustained thought”; a taxonomy grants itself no discount). And the element of dharmas is always participating—no dharma is forever unobserved by mind (the noble one’s contemplation of no-self covers everything in two successive thoughts).
-
Whether the eye sees or consciousness sees: from a question about substance to a judgment about usage. Four masters’ positions (the eye sees · consciousness sees · the discernment associated with eye consciousness sees · the assemblage sees) attack and defend by turns, and in the stanza the author marks his distance with the two words it is transmitted in “it is transmitted that it cannot observe”—Saṅghabhadra reads this as “the Sūtra-master’s mind cannot accept that reason,” Puguang judges that “the author inclines to the view that consciousness sees,” Fabao only divides the text, and Yuanhui closes with the Sautrāntikas. One Sautrāntika passage sweeps the whole board: eye and form as conditions give rise to eye consciousness—which of them is the seer, which the seen? “There are only dharmas as cause and result, and in fact no agent function”; that the eye sees and consciousness cognizes are provisional names adopted to accord with worldly feeling, and “the wise should not fasten upon them.” The later Mahāyāna forms of argument that break attachment to self and to dharmas may be read against this.
-
Ultimate atoms do not touch; the name touch is provisionally established upon there being no interval. The Vaibhāṣikas establish the sense of arising without interval (things struck together give out sound yet are not commingled; the wind element holds them so that they do not scatter); and on Dharmatrāta’s phrase about provisionally establishing the name touch the author sets down the comment, “this venerable one’s intent should be found agreeable”—and even this word of praise Saṅghabhadra rose up to interrogate. The whole world of the incidental discussions (two eyes seeing together · objects reached and not reached · the shapes of the faculties’ ultimate atoms · the two times of consciousness’s support · the levels of the four things) is of this kind: press a question to the limit of the physical, and the answer always lies between provisionally established and really existent.
A Single Point (Appended): Consciousness Is Named after the Faculty
Why is consciousness named eye consciousness rather than form consciousness? “As the faculty alters, consciousness differs”—consciousness turns with the clarity or dimness of the faculty and not with changes in the object; and the faculty is not held in common (this eye generates only this consciousness) while the object is held in common (one form may be seen by anyone). Because the support is the more excellent and because it is not held in common, the name follows the faculty.
Bearing on the Whole Treatise
The sense of seeing in “deliberation first, then decisive judgment, is called seeing,” the framework of the three kinds of discrimination (intrinsic · conceptual · recollective), and the sense of participation as a class of elements—all are the original coordinates of the later dharma-characteristics learning. With this the whole Chapter on the Elements is closed: the first half established the entities (the three classifications gathering all dharmas), the second half put them to use (the several gates as a sieve). The next chapter, on the faculties, will open out the twenty-two faculties and the five positions of the seventy-five dharmas in full.
根義·諸門分別Meaning of a Faculty and Distinctions through the Several Gates
全文五層 →Full five layers →界品明體,根品明用。此卷從「根是何義」問起,先立二十二根、再開三受為五受、依九根立三無漏根,然後用六道門與六種雜分別把二十二根從頭篩到尾——一部毘曇的『作用篇』自此開卷。
一句話:所謂根,不是二十二樣器官或成分,是二十二個『在某件事上作得了主』的位置——「夫增上用謂勝自在」,全卷所量的只有這一件事。
三個眼目
-
「增上」是一把尺,不是一個形容詞。色境也助成識,為什麼不立根?論主答「境於識中無增上用」——一個眼能為眾色諸識作通因,識又隨眼而明昧;色境兩點都反過來。不問誰在場,只問誰說了算。這把尺往後量六因四緣、量業之引滿,一路都用得上。
-
同一批二十二,可以有三套排法。有部從四事二事說增上;異師改從了自境、從身立二、同住雜染清淨說;餘師更以流轉還滅四義配十四與八。論主不判勝負,只在第五頌給出六個尺度作定義閘——心之所依、此別、此住、此雜染、此資糧、此淨,然後說「由此立根事皆究竟」。同一批零件,換一個問題就換一張圖,這是讀毘曇最要緊的一手。
-
分不分家,看有沒有分別介入。苦樂在身在心分立四根,捨受卻身心合為一根——理由只有一句「此受在身心,同無分別故」,並附一條經驗:在心的苦樂多分別而生,在身則隨境力而起,阿羅漢身上亦然。判準不在名相,在那件事本身的生起方式。
一義(附):留壽捨壽這一段傍論
命根是二十二根中唯一「定是異熟」者。但阿羅漢能留多壽行——那被拉長的命,是誰的異熟?論主錄了本論的作法(布施、發願、入第四邊際靜慮)、錄了妙音的解釋(引色界大種順違壽行),最後自出一解:把宿業所生諸根大種的住時勢分換掉,另引定力所起的勢分。
要緊的是他改的是什麼:改的是勢分,不是業。定力能換掉一段住持的量,卻沒有取消業果的原則。而能作此事者範圍極窄——三洲人、根不缺、不時解脫、得邊際定的阿羅漢。傍論之末引一首舊偈,說壽盡時歡喜猶如放下一身的病;全卷再無第二處這樣的句子。
通於全論
「增上」一義自此立,六因四緣之能作因即承此而下。二十二根之分屬色、心、心所、不相應行,正是七十五法在『作用面』的一張總表;往後百法五位之開合、心不相應行仍以命根居首,都要回到這一卷才看得出增刪的分寸。三無漏根「依九立三」——體不新增而位次三易,則是這一卷留給修道論的接口:見道十五心、修道九品、無學盡無生智,所用的根都在此處先篩過一遍。
The Chapter on the Elements sets out the entities; the Chapter on the Faculties sets out their functions. This fascicle begins from the question “what is the meaning of ‘faculty’?”, first establishes the twenty-two faculties, then opens three feelings into five, then establishes the three faculties without outflows upon nine faculties, and finally sifts the twenty-two faculties from beginning to end through six doctrinal gates and six miscellaneous analyses—the Abhidharma’s ‘book of function’ opens here.
In one sentence: a faculty is not one of twenty-two organs or ingredients but one of twenty-two positions from which mastery is exercised in some matter—“dominant function means being supreme and sovereign”—and this one thing is all that the whole fascicle measures.
Three Points to Watch
-
‘Dominance’ is a measuring rod, not an adjective. Form-objects also help bring consciousness about; why are they not established as faculties? The author of the treatise answers, “an object exercises no dominance over consciousness”—one eye serves as the common cause for the many consciousnesses of many forms, and consciousness is sharp or dull according to the eye; the form-object is the reverse on both points. The question is not who was present but who has the say. This rod will serve later in measuring the six causes and four conditions, and the projecting and completing of karma.
-
The same twenty-two admit of three arrangements. The Sarvāstivādins state dominance in terms of four matters and two matters; the alternative masters restate it in terms of discerning one’s own object, setting up two out of the body, and abiding together with defilement and purification; still other masters distribute fourteen and eight by the four senses of cyclic existence and return to cessation. The author of the treatise pronounces no verdict; in the fifth stanza he supplies six measures as the definitional gate—the support of mind, its distinction, its abiding, its defilement, its provision, its purification—and then says, “by this the matter of establishing faculties is fully accounted for.” The same parts; change the question and the diagram changes—and this is the most necessary move in reading Abhidharma.
-
Whether a thing is divided depends on whether discrimination has entered in. Pain and pleasure are established as four faculties across body and mind, while equanimous feeling is combined into a single faculty for body and mind alike—and the reason is a single sentence, “this feeling is without discrimination alike in body and mind,” with a piece of experience appended: pain and pleasure in the mind arise mostly from discrimination, while in the body they follow the force of the object, and it is so in the body of an arhat as well. The criterion lies not in the term but in the way the thing itself arises.
One Further Point (Appended): The Incidental Discussion on Prolonging and Relinquishing the Lifespan
The life faculty is the only one among the twenty-two that is “definitely maturation.” Yet an arhat can prolong the life-formations—of whose karma is the life thus extended the maturation? The author of the treatise records the root treatise’s procedure (giving, vowing, entering the fourth limit-stage meditative absorption), records Ghoṣa’s explanation (drawing in great elements of the form realm that accord with or run counter to the life-formations), and finally offers a solution of his own: the portion of duration belonging to the great elements of the faculties produced by past karma is exchanged, and a portion of duration produced by the power of concentration is drawn in instead.
What matters is what he alters: he alters the portion of duration, not the karma. The power of concentration can exchange a measure of sustained duration, and yet has not cancelled the principle of karmic result. And those able to do this fall within a very narrow range—arhats among the humans of the three continents, faculties not deficient, liberated not dependent on circumstance, and possessed of the limit-stage concentration. At the close of the incidental discussion an old stanza is quoted, saying that when the lifespan is exhausted one rejoices as though laying down a whole body of illness; nowhere else in the fascicle is there a second sentence like it.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The sense of ‘dominance’ is established here, and the enabling cause among the six causes and four conditions descends from it. That the twenty-two faculties are distributed among form, mind, mental factors, and formations not associated with mind is precisely a summary table of the seventy-five dharmas on the side of function; and later, when the five positions of the hundred dharmas are opened and closed and the formations not associated with mind still place the life faculty first, one must come back to this fascicle to see the exact measure of what was added and dropped. The three faculties without outflows are “established as three upon nine”—no new entity is added, only the position shifts three times—and this is the joint that the fascicle leaves for the theory of the path: the fifteen minds of the path of seeing, the nine grades of the path of cultivation, and the knowledge of exhaustion and of non-arising beyond training all use faculties that have first been sifted here.
俱生·心心所Co-Arising · Mind and Mental Factors
全文五層 →Full five layers →界品是就「體」說一切法,這一卷是就「用」重看一遍。一句『有沒有非得一起生的法』問出五品之綱——七十五法的全表自此鋪開,而心從一團感覺變成一張數得出來的表。
一句話:法不孤起——最小的一粒物質要八樣事才站得住,最小的一念心要二十二個心所才成一個善念;而「我有」這件事,在這裡被立成了一個法。
來歷(先立)
本卷是玄奘譯本的卷四,也是真諦舊譯卷三的開頭——二譯各自分卷,卻在同一句上斷開,都以極微聚一頌為卷首。四家古疏在此也齊聲:普光、法寶、圓暉、神泰都把它標作根品的第二大段。尤可注意的是神泰疏——他的殘本正缺卷三,也就是根品的前一卷,本卷卻逐段標數、科文最細,還時時取大乘名相來對照。這一卷是四疏俱全的一卷。
三個眼目
-
分類的判準是範圍,不是價值。心所分五品,樞紐在一個「地」字——地就是行處。大地法是遍一切心的,大善地法是既遍善心又唯善心的,大煩惱地法是既遍染心又唯染心的,大不善地法要遍且唯不善,小煩惱地法只與少分染心相應。所以一品只裝兩個法(無慚無愧)也照樣立品——不是湊數,是兩個條件同時卡住的結果。古來諸師分五品有立五義、八義、九義的,本論只用一義就分乾淨了;普光為此下了一句話:此乃論之能,非關人之解。
-
心是同時亮起的一叢燈。心與心所必定俱生,闕一則餘不起;相應之義有五——所依、所緣、行相、時、事,五者平等才叫相應。心意識三名所詮義異而體是一:集起故名心,思量故名意,了別故名識。於是一念心可以被數:欲界善心二十二,不善不共二十,有覆無記十八,無覆無記十二,睡眠隨品各增一。『這一念有幾個心所』在這裡是一個有答案的問題。要留意「見不增」——見不是第十一個法,只是慧的作用差別。
-
「擁有」被立成了一個法。斷了煩惱、得了戒、證了滅——這些說法背後,有部立了一個「得」來承擔;沒有得到聖法的那個「沒有」,就是異生性。於是本卷末段展開全論最長的一場對論:經部說得無體可知、無用可知,說差別在所依身的轉變,於是「種子」第一次被定義出來——名與色於生自果所有展轉隣近功能,由相續、轉變、差別而成。毘婆沙師堅持得是實有別物。論主的收束是一句雙印——二途皆為善說,因為一者不違理、一者是我所宗。這句話裡放了兩宗的位置,沒有判勝負。
一義(附):上界心所的遞減,是一張修定的地形圖
初靜慮除去唯不善的(瞋、七小煩惱、無慚無愧)以及惡作、睡眠;中間靜慮再除尋;二禪以上再除伺,連諂與誑也除。而每一項脫落都有所以然——色界離憂所以無惡作,色界無段食所以無睡眠,二禪以上沒有君臣尊卑相待的結構所以無諂誑。論還為此引了一段故事:馬勝苾芻上問大梵王四大何處滅盡,梵王不知而當眾自誇,事後把人拉到眾外道歉,請他回去問佛。有些煩惱不是被斷掉的,是到了那一地就無處可依。
通於全論
本卷所立五品,就是後來百法五位的底圖——數同而序異,心一開為八、心所四十六對五十一、色法同為十一、不相應十四對二十四、無為三對六。法寶在大地法下就已自作對照,說有部十法遍行而大乘唯五遍行;神泰在相應五義下引《瑜伽》三同為對,還以見相二分相配。列其異同,不判優劣——這是本編一貫的分寸。
另外,本卷第一次完整示範了俱舍通用的五門分別法式——三世、三性、界繫、三學、三斷。往後每遇一法,都可以照這五門追問一遍。
The Chapter on the Elements stated all dharmas in terms of “entity”; this fascicle looks at them once more in terms of “function.” A single question—‘are there dharmas that must arise together?’—brings out the framework of the five classes, and with it the whole table of the seventy-five dharmas; and mind turns from a mass of feeling into a table that can be counted.
In one sentence: no dharma arises alone—the smallest particle of matter needs eight entities to stand, and the smallest wholesome thought needs twenty-two mental factors to be one; and here “I have” is itself set up as a dharma.
Provenance (Established First)
This fascicle is Fascicle Four of Xuanzang’s version and also the opening of Fascicle Three of Paramārtha’s older translation—the two translations divide their fascicles independently and yet break at the same sentence, both taking the stanza on the minute aggregate as the first root stanza of the fascicle. The four ancient commentaries speak here with one voice as well: Puguang, Fabao, Yuanhui, and Shentai all mark it as the second major section of the Chapter on the Faculties. What is especially to be noted is Shentai’s commentary—his surviving text lacks precisely Fascicle Three, the fascicle preceding this one in the Chapter on the Faculties, whereas for this fascicle he numbers each passage, has the finest outline, and from time to time takes Mahāyāna terminology for comparison. This is a fascicle for which all four commentaries are present.
Three Points to Watch
-
The criterion of classification is scope, not value. Mental factors fall into five classes, and the pivot is the single word “ground”—a ground is a place of activity. The factors of the great ground pervade every mind; the factors of the great wholesome ground both pervade wholesome minds and belong to them alone; the factors of the great defiled ground both pervade defiled minds and belong to them alone; the factors of the great unwholesome ground must both pervade the unwholesome and belong to it alone; the factors of the small defiled ground are associated only with a small portion of defiled minds. So a class holding only two dharmas (non-conscience and shamelessness) is set up all the same—not to make up numbers, but as the result of two conditions clamping down at once. The masters of old divided the five classes by five senses, by eight, by nine; this treatise divides them cleanly by one sense alone, and Puguang set down a sentence for it: this is the treatise’s own capacity, and not a matter of anyone’s interpretation.
-
Mind is a cluster of lamps lit at the same moment. Mind and mental factors necessarily arise together, and if one is lacking the rest do not arise; association has five senses—support, object, mode of apprehension, time, and entity—and only when all five are even is there association. The three names mind, thought, and consciousness convey different senses and are one in entity: because it gathers and gives rise it is called mind, because it deliberates it is called thought, because it discerns it is called consciousness. A single thought can therefore be counted: a wholesome mind of the desire realm has twenty-two, an unwholesome mind of the independent class twenty, an obscured-indeterminate mind eighteen, an unobscured-indeterminate mind twelve, and sleep adds one to whichever class it is in. ‘How many mental factors are in this thought’ is here a question with an answer. Note that “view does not add to the count”—view is not an eleventh dharma but only a difference of operation of discernment.
-
“Having” is set up as a dharma. Afflictions cut off, precepts acquired, cessation realized—behind these ways of speaking the Sarvāstivādins set up an “acquisition” to bear them; and the “not having” of not having obtained the noble dharmas is ordinary-being status. The closing section of the fascicle then opens the longest debate in the whole treatise: the Sautrāntikas say that acquisition has no entity that can be known and no operation that can be known, and that the difference lies in the transformation of the supporting body—whereupon “seed” receives its first definition, as the capability—serially transmitted or immediately proximate—that name and form have with respect to producing their own result, constituted by continuum, transformation, and distinctiveness. The Vaibhāṣikas hold firmly that acquisition is a real separate thing. The author of the treatise closes with a double endorsement—both roads are well stated, because the one does not conflict with reason and the other is what his own school holds. That sentence sets the place of both schools within it, and pronounces no victor.
One Further Point (Appended): The Reduction of Mental Factors in the Upper Realms Is a Topographical Map for Cultivating Absorption
The first meditative absorption removes what is unwholesome alone (hatred, the seven small afflictions, non-conscience, and shamelessness) together with regret and sleep; the intermediate absorption further removes applied thought; from the second absorption upward sustained thought is removed, and flattery and deception with it. And every item that falls away has its reason—the form realm is free of sorrow and so has no regret; the form realm has no food taken in portions and so has no sleep; above the second absorption there is no structure of ruler and subject, higher and lower, and so there is no flattery or deception. The treatise even cites a story for it: the monk Aśvajit asked the Great Brahmā King where the four great elements cease, the Brahmā King did not know and praised himself before the assembly, and afterwards drew the man outside the assembly to apologize and send him back to ask the Buddha. Some afflictions are not cut off; they simply have nowhere to rest once a given level is reached.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The five classes established in this fascicle are the ground plan of the later five positions of the hundred dharmas—the same in number and different in order: mind opens from one into eight, forty-six mental factors against fifty-one, eleven dharmas of form in both, fourteen unassociated against twenty-four, three unconditioned against six. Fabao already drew the comparison for himself under the factors of the great ground, saying that in the Sarvāstivāda ten dharmas are omnipresent while in the Mahāyāna only five are; Shentai under the five senses of association cited the three samenesses of the Yogācārabhūmi for comparison and matched them further with the two aspects, image and perceiving. Their agreements and differences are listed and no verdict of merit is passed—this is the constant measure of the present edition.
Besides this, the fascicle demonstrates in full for the first time the Kośa’s general formula of analysis by five gates—the three times, the three ethical qualities, realm affiliation, the three kinds of training, and the three modes of abandonment. Every dharma one meets thereafter may be put to the same five questions.
心不相應行Formations Not Associated with Mind
全文五層 →Full five layers →十四不相應行之十二,一卷說完:同分、無想果、無想定、滅盡定、命根、四相與四隨相、名句文身,以及它們在界繫、五類、三性上的定位。有部立之為色心之外別有實物,論主一一以經部之義推徵,末後又親手判經部「非善說」。
一句話:凡是不能歸給色、也不能歸給心,卻在經驗裡確實起著作用的那些「所以然」——相似、空白、相續、遷流、意義——都被收在這裡;問題是,它們該算實物,還是只算一個說法。
來歷(先立)
上一卷已辯得與非得,本卷續之。體例每條相同:有部立宗、舉經證、開四句;論主換上經部的眼睛推徵;末後一句「此非善說,違我宗故」,說完經部的話又聲明自己不是經部。眾賢《順正理》於此逐段反破,稱世親為「經主」,是全論對辯最密的一卷;四家疏(光記、寶疏、頌疏、神泰疏)於此皆有卷五對釋,神泰疏更轉引真諦本疏,為卷中三引頌各指所出。
三個眼目
-
同分:一個名詞背後被預設的東西。萬千有情各各不同,人卻能一齊喚作「有情」——有部說,這靠的是一件實物在起作用。論主的五問一問比一問尖:既有異生同分,何必再立異生性?穀麥金鐵各自相似,何不許無情同分?同分彼此也有差別,何不再立一層?末問最重——這一立,豈不成了勝論的同異句義。有部只答得最後一問,其餘退回經證。名詞的穩定,究竟是世界的結構,還是言說的方便,此處第一次正面成為問題。
-
二定:同樣關掉心,發心不同則果報全異。無想定與滅盡定形貌幾乎一樣,分野只在一念作意——一個「以出離想作意為先」而執無想為真解脫,一個「以止息想作意為先」而求靜住。於是一個唯異生得、感無想天五百劫的空白,一個唯聖者得、成俱分解脫;聖者看無想定「如見深坑不樂入」。而滅定中到底有沒有心,檯面上已擺出三個答案:過去有體、心與有根身互為種子、猶有細心。這一頁是讀唯識之前最該熟的一頁——問題與後來立第八識恆行的問題,是同一個。
-
四相:無常被講成了一個結構。生令起、住令安、異令衰、滅令壞;經只說三相,因為「住是有情所愛著處」,要令人厭捨才與異合說。論給的譬喻是稠林三怨——一個把你從未來拖進現在,一個削你的力,一個斷你的命。有部把四相安在剎那上,並以本相八法、隨相一法之功能別止住無窮之難;經部說這是「分析虛空」,主張四相只在相續上才有位置,連引三頌坐實。你所愛著的正是那個「住」,而經連這一個名字都不肯單獨給你。
一義(附):命根
命根不是一團生命力,也不是靈魂。它的定義是功能式的——「能持煖識」,令體溫與識維持在同一相續上的那個因。世尊親說的一頌給了誰都見過的驗證:三法捨身之時,所捨的身便僵仆,如木無思覺。至於這個「持」該不該算一件實物,論主推了十八轉:立實物者要背三法互持的循環,立勢分者要背無體之難。兩造的代價都攤在桌上,論主末後仍替有部收尾。
通於全論
本卷所辯即七十五法的心不相應行位,是往後百法二十四的底圖:非得被減去、異生性反被收入,四相之異滅改稱老與無常,名句文身則原封承用。真諦舊譯此段作「生老住無常」,與百法用語同軌。而『無心位如何接續』『意義如何被載住』這兩個難題,此後一路走進唯識——回讀俱舍,才知道那些答案原是為什麼問題而設。
Twelve of the fourteen formations not associated with mind are finished in a single fascicle: commonality, the result of non-perception, the absorption without perception, the absorption of cessation, the life faculty, the four marks and the four secondary marks, and the name-, phrase-, and syllable-bodies, together with their placement under realm affiliation, the five classes, and the three ethical qualities. The Sarvāstivādins establish them as separate real things apart from form and mind; the author of the treatise presses each one with the Sautrāntika sense, and at the end judges the Sautrāntikas with his own hand as “not well stated.”
In one sentence: whatever cannot be assigned to form and cannot be assigned to mind, and yet really does work within experience—the ‘reasons why’ of resemblance, of the blank, of continuity, of flowing, and of meaning—are all gathered here; the question is whether they count as real things or only as a way of speaking.
Provenance (Established First)
The preceding fascicle analyzed acquisition and non-acquisition, and this fascicle continues it. The pattern of each item is the same: the Sarvāstivādins establish the thesis, adduce scriptural proof, and open a fourfold analysis; the author of the treatise puts on Sautrāntika eyes and presses; and at the end comes the sentence “this is not well stated, because it contradicts my own school”—having spoken the Sautrāntikas’ words, he declares that he is not a Sautrāntika. Saṅghabhadra’s Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle refutes this passage by passage, calling Vasubandhu “the Sūtra-master”; it is the most densely contested fascicle in the whole treatise. All four commentaries (Puguang’s Record, Fabao’s Commentary, Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary, and Shentai’s Commentary) have a fifth fascicle explaining it, and Shentai’s further cites Paramārtha’s own commentary at second hand, assigning a source to each of the three quoted stanzas within the fascicle.
Three Points to Watch
-
Commonality: what is presupposed behind a noun. Sentient beings without number differ severally, and yet a person can call them all at once “sentient beings”—the Sarvāstivādins say this rests upon a real thing at work. The author of the treatise’s five questions grow sharper one by one: given a commonality of ordinary beings, what need is there for ordinary-being status besides? Grain, wheat, gold, and iron each resemble their own kinds—why not allow a commonality of the insentient? The several commonalities also differ—why not establish a further tier? And the last is the weightiest: does not this establishment amount to the Vaiśeṣikas’ category of sameness-and-difference? The Sarvāstivādins answer only the last and fall back on scripture for the rest. Whether the stability of a noun is the structure of the world or the convenience of speech becomes here, for the first time, a question squarely faced.
-
The two absorptions: shutting off mind in the same way, but with different aspiration the results differ entirely. The absorption without perception and the absorption of cessation are almost identical in appearance, and the divide is a single moment of attention—the one “preceded by an attention with the notion of renunciation,” holding non-perception to be true liberation; the other “preceded by an attention with the notion of stilling,” seeking peaceful abiding. Hence the one is attained by ordinary beings only and brings about five hundred aeons of blankness in the Heaven of Non-Percipient Beings, while the other is attained by noble ones only and makes one liberated in both parts; and the noble ones regard the absorption without perception “as the sight of a deep pit, and take no pleasure in entering it.” As to whether there is any mind at all within the absorption of cessation, three answers are already on the table: the past has entity, mind and the body endowed with faculties are seeds of one another, and there is still a subtle mind. This page is the one most worth being thoroughly familiar with before reading Yogācāra—the question is the same question that the later constant running of the eighth consciousness was set up to answer.
-
The four marks: impermanence stated as a structure. Arising makes a dharma arise, abiding makes it settle, change makes it decay, cessation makes it break up; the sūtra states only three marks, because “abiding is what sentient beings cling to and love,” and to make them weary of it, it is stated together with change. The treatise’s simile is the three enemies in the dense forest—one drags you from the future into the present, one wears down your strength, one cuts off your life. The Sarvāstivādins set the four marks upon the moment and stop the objection of infinite regress by the difference of function between the primary marks upon eight dharmas and the secondary marks upon one; the Sautrāntikas call this “cutting up empty space” and maintain that the four marks have places to stand only upon a continuum, quoting three stanzas in a row to make it firm. What you cling to is precisely that “abiding,” and the sūtra will not even give you that name by itself.
One Further Point (Appended): The Life Faculty
The life faculty is not a lump of vital force, and it is not a soul. Its definition is functional—“able to sustain warmth and consciousness,” the cause that keeps bodily warmth and consciousness upon one and the same continuum. A stanza the World-Honored One himself spoke gives a verification anyone has seen: when the three dharmas leave the body, the body they leave lies stiff and prone, like a piece of wood without thought or feeling. As to whether this “sustaining” should count as a real thing, the author of the treatise presses through eighteen turns: one who establishes a real thing must carry the circle of the three sustaining one another, and one who establishes a portion of duration must carry the objection of having no entity. The cost to both parties lies open on the table, and at the end the author of the treatise still closes for the Sarvāstivādins.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
What this fascicle analyzes is the position of the formations not associated with mind among the seventy-five dharmas, and it is the ground plan of the later twenty-four of the hundred dharmas: non-acquisition is dropped, ordinary-being status is on the contrary taken in, change and cessation among the four marks are renamed aging and impermanence, and the name-, phrase-, and syllable-bodies are carried over unaltered. Paramārtha’s older translation renders this passage “arising, aging, abiding, and impermanence,” on the same track as the wording of the hundred dharmas. And the two difficulties of ‘how continuity is maintained in a mindless station’ and ‘how meaning is carried’ run on from here all the way into Yogācāra—it is by reading the Kośa back that one learns for what questions those answers were devised.
六因·五果Six Causes · Five Results
全文五層 →Full five layers →分別根品大文第三之始。前三卷說『有哪些法』,這一卷說『這些法憑什麼起來』——因開為六、果開為五,取果與果定其時,四法從因生收其局。因訖而卷斷,四緣另起。
一句話:把「法從因生」拆到最細,是為了說出最後那一句——一因生法,決定無有。
來歷(先立)
三家疏主在卷首落同一刀:普光作「此下當品大文第三明因緣」、法寶作「此下當品大文第三明因及緣」、圓暉作「從此大文第三,明因緣」;神泰別以五分立科而界處不移。卷末圓暉結「已上不同,總是第一,明因已竟」——注家的結語,正落在玄奘分卷的刀口上。本頌第六十二頌橫跨因與緣,譯家捨頌界而從義界,此卷之末於是標作正六十一與正六十二前半。
三個眼目
-
「對法諸師許」五個字定下全卷的姿態。論標六因,末句寫的是「對法諸師許因唯有如是六種」——下的是「許」,不是「佛說」。圓暉隨即記下經部的反問:四緣有經說故許之,六因無經說故不許;法寶亦記四緣有文而六因無文。眾賢反是,逐條舉經而斷「如是六因,佛處處說」。有無經據,本論未判,二造並錄。六因好不好用,看它能不能把『法憑什麼起』講得無漏。讀阿毘達磨的第一課,是分清哪些是論所直說、哪些是後人代判。
-
能作因把『不妨礙』也算成因。判準只有三個字——無障住:某法生起的那一刻,其餘一切法不加阻攔地在那裡,就夠了。連涅槃與畢竟不生之法都算,理由是「如無力國王」——沒有能力損害,國人一樣說「我因國主而得安樂」。因的下限被放到這麼低,是為了讓一法之起牽動法界全體;而它的果(增上果)卻只限有為——寬因狹果,正是後面「無為無因果」那一大諍的伏筆。
-
同時因果與相續之空位。俱有因說因與果同時而且互為對方,經部立刻反詰「未見如斯同時因果」;而異熟因那一頭又說得極死——異熟果不與業俱、也不無間,必待相續轉變方能辦成。一頭主張同時,一頭堅持隔越,中間那段「相續」由什麼承載,本論此處不答。這個空位,是全卷留給後代最大的一筆。
一義(附):無為是不是一件東西
「果有為離繫,無為無因果」一頌之下,是全卷最長的一場論諍。經部說一切無為皆非實有——虛空只是無所觸,擇滅只是由簡擇力而餘不更生;有部說它別有實體、聖者各別內證。論主錄二造之言而以「毘婆沙師不許此釋」收住,自己不下總判。眾賢則毫不含糊,直標「我今正破經主謗因」,末結「如是已破經主謗因,成立涅槃其體實有」。爭點不在文而在體:雙方都承認經說涅槃第一,爭的是這個第一是實有一物,還是畢竟非有。
通於全論
五果之名——異熟、等流、離繫、士用、增上——後世原封承用不改一字;能作因日後開為十因、二十因;而異熟因與果之間必待相續、本論不立別體之處,正是後來立異熟識的空位。法寶在六因段末已把這條線拉出來,並留下一問:大乘十因六因及四緣之義出於何經文。古德未答,此處亦不代答,只記其為座標。
The opening of the third major division of the Chapter on the Faculties. The three preceding fascicles said which dharmas there are; this one says what these dharmas arise by — causes opened out into six, results into five, the taking and the giving of a result fixing their times, and the four classes of dharmas arising from causes closing off the field. Causes end and the fascicle breaks off; the four conditions begin again elsewhere.
In one sentence: “Dharmas arise from causes” is taken apart to its last grain in order to say the one line that comes at the end — a dharma produced by a single cause definitely does not exist.
Provenance (established first)
Three commentators cut at the same place at the head of the fascicle: Puguang writes, “From here begins the third major division of this chapter, explaining causes and conditions”; Fabao writes, “From here begins the third major division of this chapter, explaining cause and also condition”; Yuanhui writes, “From here, the third major division, explaining causes and conditions.” Shentai instead sets up a fivefold outline, yet the boundary does not shift. At the fascicle’s end Yuanhui concludes, “All the distinctions above belong in sum to the first part; the explanation of causes is complete” — a commentator’s closing words falling precisely on the line along which Xuanzang divided the fascicle. Root Stanza 62 straddles cause and condition; the translator gave up the stanza boundary and followed the doctrinal one, and so the end of this fascicle is marked as Root 61 together with the first half of Root 62.
Three eyes
-
Five words — “the Abhidharma masters allow” — set the posture of the whole fascicle. The treatise lists six causes, and the closing sentence reads, “The Abhidharma masters allow that causes are only these six kinds.” What is set down is “allow,” not “the Buddha said.” Yuanhui at once records the Sautrāntika counter-question: the four conditions they allow, because scripture states them; the six causes they do not, because scripture does not. Fabao likewise records that the four conditions have textual warrant while the six causes have none. Saṅghabhadra holds the contrary, adducing scripture item by item and ruling, “These six causes the Buddha stated everywhere.” Whether there is scriptural warrant this treatise does not adjudicate; both parties are recorded. Whether the six causes serve well is a question of whether they can state without remainder what dharmas arise by. The first lesson in reading Abhidharma is to tell apart what the treatise itself says outright and what later hands have decided on its behalf.
-
The enabling cause counts even “not getting in the way” as a cause. The criterion is three words — abiding without obstructing: at the moment a given dharma arises, all other dharmas are there without blocking it, and that is enough. Even nirvāṇa and dharmas that will never arise at all are counted, on the ground of “like a king without power” — he has no capacity to do harm, and the people of the realm still say, “Because of our sovereign we obtain ease.” The lower limit of causation is set this low so that the arising of one dharma may draw in the whole realm of dharmas; yet its result, the dominant result, is restricted to the conditioned — a wide cause with a narrow result, and exactly the foreshadowing of that great dispute further on over “the unconditioned has neither cause nor result.”
-
Simultaneous cause and result, and the vacancy left for the continuum. The coexistent cause holds that cause and result are simultaneous and are moreover each the other’s; the Sautrāntikas counter at once, “No such simultaneous cause and result has ever been seen.” At the other end the maturation cause is stated with complete rigidity — a maturation result is neither simultaneous with the action nor immediately subsequent to it; it can be brought about only when a continuum has transformed. One end asserts simultaneity, the other insists on separation; what carries the stretch of “continuum” in between, the treatise does not answer here. That vacancy is the largest single bequest this fascicle leaves to later ages.
One meaning (appended): Is the unconditioned a thing?
Beneath the stanza “Results are the conditioned and release from bondage; the unconditioned has neither cause nor result” lies the longest dispute in the fascicle. The Sautrāntikas say that no unconditioned dharma is really existent — space is merely the absence of anything tangible, and cessation through discernment is merely the non-recurrence of what is left over, brought about by the force of selection. The Sarvāstivādins say it has a separate real entity, realized inwardly and severally by the noble ones. The author of the treatise records the words of both parties and closes with “The Vaibhāṣikas do not allow this explanation,” passing no overall judgment of his own. Saṅghabhadra is in no way equivocal: he announces outright, “I now refute the Sūtra-master’s slander of causes,” and concludes, “Thus the Sūtra-master’s slander of causes has been refuted, and it is established that nirvāṇa is real in its entity.” The point at issue is not the wording but the entity: both sides grant that scripture calls nirvāṇa foremost; what they contest is whether this foremost is one really existent thing, or is utterly non-existent.
Through the whole treatise
The names of the five results — maturation, homogeneous, release from bondage, human effort, dominant — were taken over intact by later ages without the change of a single word; the enabling cause was afterwards opened out into ten causes and twenty causes; and the place where a continuum must intervene between the maturation cause and its result, while this treatise posits no separate entity to carry it, is exactly the vacancy that the maturation consciousness would later be established to fill. Fabao had already drawn this line out at the end of the section on the six causes, leaving a question behind: from what scriptural text does the sense of the Mahāyāna ten causes, six causes, and four conditions come? The ancient masters did not answer it, nor is it answered here on their behalf; it is recorded only as a coordinate.
四緣·十二心Four Conditions · Twelve Minds
全文五層 →Full five layers →六因既訖,論主追問一句「緣復云何」,於是立四緣、定其作用之位、核諸法之緣數;中間以三條理路破『世間由一因所生』之執;末後把八行頌全給了心——十二心相生、開為二十心、現前得心多少。四緣是綱,一念心是場。
一句話:其餘三緣管『憑什麼生』,唯獨等無間緣管『接在誰後面生』——而修行所爭的,正是下一念心接在哪裡。
位置(先立)
本卷承上卷末之半首頌而起:那首頌恰橫在『因訖/緣起』的關節上,玄奘分卷時捨頌界而從義界,所以本卷從半首頌開端。神泰疏數本卷正頌為「十二行半」,正是此故。真諦本則逕以「分別四緣義」名此一段,並以「分別四緣義究竟」結卷——二本開合互異而收界同處。
三個眼目
-
四緣是四種分類,不是四件東西。經說「四緣性」,論釋那個「性」字為「此中性者是緣種類」——只是『這一類』的意思。四緣與六因也不是兩套清單,而是同一批作用的兩種切法;寶疏一語道破:「因是親稱、緣是疎名」。六因裡五親一疎,四緣裡三疎一親,所以能作因被挑出去配增上緣,而增上緣的實義不是『加強』,是不障礙——什麼都不做,只是不擋路,所以範圍最寬。
-
「等無間」是位置的讓渡,不是同類的傳承。色法不能作此緣,因為色可以幾樣並排現前而心不能——一念只有一個受、一個想,「等」字的實義在此。而讓位的是整個心品,不是受讓給受:「前心品法總為後品等無間緣,非唯自類」。只認自類者要付的代價,論一句點破——最初那一念無漏心之前並無同類,豈不成了缺一緣而生。此緣又只論心的序列,不論時間長短:無想定過了五百劫再出定,中間「不隔心心所」,仍算無間。
-
破的是「一因」,不是「有因」。三條理路:世間次第而起,單一不變之因推不出有先後的果;費大功力而不知所為何來,若造苦具只為自娛,則「自在」二字自相矛盾;且抹煞了眼前可驗的人功因緣。論主自己把結論寫得很清楚——「故無有法唯一因生」,隨即「且止破邪,應辯正義」轉身回到法數。這一破不是為了辯勝,是把因果的責任還給造業的人:各自造業,「自受異熟及士用果」。
一義(附):那一首外道的頌
論主說「咄哉!何用此自在為」之後,忽然引外道自誦的一首頌,還加一句「誠為善說」。所贊者不是那位天,而是這首頌把他描述準了——你既說他造地獄以自娛,那麼你們自己頌中「恒逼害」「樂食血肉髓」的形容,正好對得上。此頌非本論之頌,古德繫之於事奉自在天的婆羅門;至於「誠為善說」是反諷還是順取,光記讀為調弄、泰疏讀為順取,四疏不同,並錄不判。
通於全卷
十二心是一張心的清單,十二心相生是一張心的交通圖,二十心把善與無記再切細,得心多少則記錄一個人在三界階梯上移動了多遠——先前不成、如今成就,就叫「得」。末後一頌以五門收之:託生、入定、離染、退、續善。逐心而算是一軸,逐門而收是另一軸;同一批事實換軸重排,才記得住、用得上。阿毘達磨算得這樣細,理由就在這裡:修行的進退是可以逐格記帳的。
The six causes done, the author presses one further question — “And what of conditions?” — and thereupon establishes the four conditions, fixes the position at which each operates, and audits how many conditions each class of dharma arises from; midway he refutes, by three lines of reasoning, the view that the world is produced by a single cause; and at the end he gives eight lines of stanza entirely to mind — how the twelve minds arise from one another, their unfolding into twenty minds, and how many minds are acquired when one is present. The four conditions are the net-cord; a single moment of mind is the field.
In one sentence: The other three conditions govern what a thing arises on the basis of; the immediately antecedent condition alone governs what a thing arises after — and what practice contests is precisely where the next moment of mind will connect.
Placement (established first)
This fascicle begins from the half-stanza at the end of the previous one: that stanza lies exactly across the joint where causes end and conditions begin, and in dividing the fascicles Xuanzang gave up the stanza boundary and followed the doctrinal one, so that this fascicle opens with half a stanza. It is for this reason that Shentai’s Commentary counts the root stanzas of this fascicle as “twelve and a half lines.” Paramārtha’s version, for its part, names this section simply “Analysis of the Sense of the Four Conditions” and closes his fascicle with “the analysis of the sense of the four conditions is complete” — the two versions divide and join differently, yet their closing boundary falls at the same place.
Three eyes
-
The four conditions are four classifications, not four things. Scripture says “the nature of the four conditions,” and the treatise glosses that word “nature”: “nature here means the class of a condition” — merely “this class.” Nor are the four conditions and the six causes two separate lists; they are two ways of cutting one and the same set of operations. Fabao’s Commentary settles it in a phrase: “cause is the name for what is intimate, condition the name for what is remote.” Among the six causes five are intimate and one remote; among the four conditions three are remote and one intimate — which is why the enabling cause is taken out and matched to the dominant condition. And the real sense of “dominant” is not reinforcing but not obstructing — it does nothing whatever, only keeps out of the way, and for that very reason its range is the widest.
-
“Immediately antecedent” is the handing over of a place, not a succession within a kind. Form cannot serve as this condition, because several forms may become present side by side while minds cannot — one moment has one feeling and one perception, and this is the real sense of the word “equal.” And what hands over its place is the whole class of mind, not feeling to feeling: “the dharmas of the preceding class of mind as a whole are the immediately antecedent condition of the following class, and not only what is of their own kind.” The price paid by those who admit only one’s own kind the treatise settles in a sentence — before the very first moment of a mind without outflows there is nothing of the same kind at all, so that this moment would have to arise lacking one of the four conditions. This condition, moreover, concerns only the sequence of minds and not the length of time: when one emerges from the absorption without perception after five hundred aeons, since in the interval “no mind or mental factor intervenes,” it still counts as immediate.
-
What is refuted is “a single cause,” not “having a cause.” Three lines of reasoning: the world arises in sequence, and a single unchanging cause cannot yield results that come earlier and later; great effort is expended with no discernible purpose, and if instruments of suffering are made merely for the maker’s own delight, the very name Īśvara, the Sovereign, contradicts itself; and the position wipes out the causes and conditions of human effort that can be verified before one’s eyes. The author writes his conclusion out plainly — “therefore there is no dharma produced by a single cause alone” — and at once turns back to the enumeration of dharmas with “enough of refuting error; the correct doctrine should now be set out.” This refutation is not made in order to win an argument but to hand the responsibility for cause and result back to those who act: each acts for himself and “undergoes his own maturation result and result of human effort.”
One meaning (appended): That stanza of the non-Buddhist
After the author says, “Enough! What use is such an Īśvara?”, he suddenly quotes a stanza recited by the non-Buddhists themselves, and adds the remark, “This is truly well said.” What is praised is not that god but the accuracy with which the stanza describes him — since you say he makes the hells for his own delight, the descriptions in your own stanza, “constantly oppressing and harming” and “delighting to feed on blood, flesh, and marrow,” fit him exactly. The stanza is not one of this treatise’s own; the ancient masters assign it to the brahmins who serve Īśvara. As to whether “this is truly well said” is irony or straightforward assent, Puguang’s Record reads it as mockery and Shentai’s Commentary as assent; the four commentaries differ, and both readings are recorded without adjudication.
Through the whole fascicle
The twelve minds are an inventory of mind; the arising of the twelve minds from one another is a traffic map of mind; the twenty minds cut the wholesome and the indeterminate finer still; and the number of minds acquired records how far a person has moved on the ladder of the three realms — what was not accomplished before and is accomplished now is what “acquisition” means. A final stanza gathers everything under five gates: taking birth, entering absorption, becoming free from defilement, falling back, and restoring wholesome roots. Counting mind by mind is one axis, gathering gate by gate is another; only when one and the same set of facts is rearranged on a second axis can it be remembered and put to use. This is the reason Abhidharma reckons so finely: progress and regress in practice can be entered in the ledger square by square.
三界五趣·四生·中有The Three Realms and Five Destinies · Four Modes of Birth · Intermediate Existence
全文五層 →Full five layers →界品明體,根品明用,世品明有情與器之所安立。此卷從「三界是何?各於其中處別有幾?」問起,一路走完三界、五趣、七識住、九有情居、四識住、四生,最後停在中有,並用全卷一半以上的力氣證它實有——有情世間九目,此卷走完前七。
一句話:這一卷不是在描寫天堂地獄,是在替『眾生存在的每一種位置』編號;編到死與生之間那一段沒有編號時,論主寧可為它另立一個實有的身,也不肯讓相續出現斷點。
三個眼目
-
同一批處所,換一把尺就換一個數。色界處,頌立十七而長行並錄迦濕彌羅之十六——差別只在大梵天算不算別地。七識住與九有情居量的是同一批地方,前者問『識會不會被損壞』,後者問『有情願不願意住』,於是有頂與無想有情在前一張表被除、在後一張表被收。遇到數目不合,第一問不是誰對,是這兩個數用了哪兩把尺。 這一手全卷示範了三次。
-
『有』與『被列入某一格』是兩件事。中有實有,這是本卷後半整段所證;但中有不是趣——「趣謂所往,不可說言中有是所往」;中有也不名生——「未至應至處,故中有非生」。連續兩次把它從既有名相中剝出來,正是為了給它一個乾淨的、單獨的位置。毘曇的分寸感就在這裡:承認一物存在,不等於允許它借用鄰格的名字。
-
趣體只能取無記那一分。理由一句話——「若異此者趣應相雜」:同一個人身上具有通往五趣的業與煩惱,若把善與染污也算進趣體,一人便同時是五趣。所以趣體只取無覆無記那一分。判準不在苦樂,在能不能無雜。 這把尺後來被整批搬走,用在別的地方去證別的東西。
一義(附):中有為什麼非立不可
論主給的正面理由只有一句:「現見世間相續轉法,要處無間剎那續生。」穀種在此、芽亦在此,中間沒有跳格。有情相續之理應當一樣。
難者拿鏡像來反例——質在此、像在彼,中間明明有間而續生成立。論主用三層縱奪拆它:你的例子根本不實有(一處不能有二色並存,四番逐破);就算實有也不像(質與像不是一相續,且二者俱時而有);連生的緣數都不同(像由本質與鏡二緣生,生有卻「唯有死有無別勝依」)。三層拆完,才轉入教證,一部一部往下逼:七有經、健達縛經、掌馬族經、五不還經——你若不誦這部,那部呢。
全卷末後立了一條可以雙向使用的規矩:「凡引證言理無異趣,此有異趣為證不成。」——引來作證的話,其理不得有第二種走向。論主自己引經時,也受這一條約束。
通於全論
三界之立,是往後界繫、隨眠隨增、業之引滿的坐標系;「隨增三界貪者是三界繫」一句所立的判準——界的分限不在境的高低,在貪的落點——隨眠品要整章用它。五趣唯無覆無記,是『趣』字的定義閘。四生以『依託什麼而起』為判準而非以形態,故化生一格寬到能收中有,這是本卷立中有的預留位置。
還有兩件事是這一卷留給讀者的線頭:其一,論主在本卷兩處明錄經部之說(無色界心等相續、極光淨天想異),二處眾賢皆有反破——世親傳所記「立薩婆多義隨有僻處以經部義破之」,在此可以看見它具體長什麼樣。其二,中有的形貌、所往、住時之量,本卷一概未及;那是下一卷的事。這一卷只做一件事:把它立起來。
The Chapter on the Elements displays the entities of dharmas, the Chapter on the Faculties their functions, and the Chapter on the World the establishing of sentient beings and of the receptacle that holds them. This fascicle begins from the question “What are the three realms? And within each of them, how many separate places are there?”, and runs its whole course through the three realms, the five destinies, the seven stations of consciousness, the nine abodes of sentient beings, the four stations of consciousness, and the four modes of birth, coming to rest at last on intermediate existence, on proving the real existence of which it spends more than half the strength of the whole fascicle — of the nine items of the world of sentient beings, this fascicle completes the first seven.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not describing heavens and hells; it is assigning a number to every position in which a sentient being can exist — and when the numbering reached the stretch between death and birth and found it unnumbered, the author would sooner establish for it a further body that really exists than let a break appear in the continuum.
Three Points to Watch
-
One and the same set of places yields a different number as soon as a different measure is applied. For the places of the form realm the stanza establishes seventeen while the prose commentary records alongside it the sixteen of Kaśmīra — the difference lying only in whether the Mahābrahmā Heaven is counted a separate level. The seven stations of consciousness and the nine abodes of sentient beings measure the very same set of places: the former asks whether consciousness will be injured there, the latter whether sentient beings are willing to dwell there; and so the summit of existence and the non-percipient sentient beings are struck out of the first table and gathered into the second. When two numbers do not agree, the first question is not which of them is right, but which two measures the two numbers were taken with. This fascicle demonstrates the move three times.
-
“Existing” and “being entered in a given square” are two different things. Intermediate existence really exists, and the whole latter half of this fascicle is the proof of it; yet intermediate existence is not a destiny — “a destiny is what is gone to, and one cannot say that intermediate existence is what is gone to”; nor is intermediate existence named birth — “it has not yet reached the place it should reach, and so intermediate existence is not birth.” Twice in succession it is peeled out of the names already established, and precisely in order to give it a clean place of its own. Here is where Abhidharma’s sense of proportion lies: to grant that a thing exists is not to permit it to borrow the name of the neighboring square.
-
The entity of a destiny can be taken only from the indeterminate portion. The reason is one sentence — “were it otherwise, the destinies would be mixed together”: one and the same person carries in himself the actions and afflictions that lead to all five destinies, and if the wholesome and the defiled were reckoned into the entity of a destiny as well, a single person would be five destinies at once. So the entity of a destiny takes only the unobscured-indeterminate portion. The criterion is not suffering and pleasure but whether mixture can be kept out. This measure is afterwards carried off wholesale and used elsewhere to prove other things.
One Further Point (Appended): Why Intermediate Existence Had to Be Established
The one positive reason the author gives is a single sentence: “We plainly see that dharmas that turn on in continuity in the world must arise in succession moment by moment with their places uninterrupted.” The seed of the grain is here and the sprout is here as well; there is no skipped square in between. The continuity of sentient beings ought to run by the same principle.
The objector brings a reflected image as a counter-example — the substance is here and the image is there, plainly with an interval between, and the successive arising holds all the same. The author takes it apart in three descending layers: your example does not really exist at all (two forms cannot stand together in one place, refuted in four rounds); even granting that it existed, it is not alike (substance and image are not one continuum, and the two are present at the same time); and even the number of conditions for their arising differs (an image arises from two conditions, the substance and the mirror, whereas the existence of birth has “only the existence of death and no further superior support”). Only when the three layers have been taken apart does he turn to the scriptural proof, pressing one collection down after another: the Sūtra of the Seven Existences, the Gandharva Sūtra, the Sūtra of the Horse-Keeping Clan, the Sūtra of the Five Non-Returners — if you do not recite this one, then what of that one?
At the very end of the fascicle a rule is set up that can be used in both directions: “Whenever words are adduced as proof, their principle may have no other tendency; and since this has another tendency, it does not hold as proof.” — words brought in as evidence may not admit of a second direction. When the author himself adduces scripture, he too is bound by this rule.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The establishing of the three realms is the coordinate system for realm affiliation further on, for the increase of the latent tendencies by attachment, and for the projecting and completing actions of the chapter on action; and the criterion set up in the one sentence “what has the greed of the three realms increasing upon it by attachment belongs to the three realms” — that the boundary of a realm lies not in the height of the object but in where the greed falls — is what the chapter on the latent tendencies will use for a whole chapter together. That the five destinies are unobscured-indeterminate alone is the gate defining the word “destiny.” The four modes of birth take as their criterion what a being arises in dependence upon and not its shape, and so the single square of birth by transformation is wide enough to gather in intermediate existence: this is the place reserved in advance by which this fascicle establishes intermediate existence.
Two further loose threads are left by this fascicle for its readers. First, in two places the author expressly records a Sautrāntika position (the continuity of mind and the rest in the formless realm, and the difference of perception among the Ābhāsvara gods), and in both places Saṅghabhadra counter-refutes — what the Life of Master Vasubandhu records of the manner of this treatise’s composition, that he “established the sense of the Sarvāstivādins and, wherever there was a partial position, refuted it with the sense of the Sautrāntikas,” can here be seen in concrete shape. Second, the appearance of intermediate existence, where it goes, and the measure of the time it abides are nowhere touched in this fascicle; that is the business of the next. This fascicle does one thing only: it sets intermediate existence up.
中有·入胎·緣起總說Intermediate Existence · Entry into the Womb · Dependent Origination in General
全文五層 →Full five layers →上卷證中有實有,本卷逕問「當往何趣,所起中有形狀如何?」——先以諸門盡中有之相,次辨入胎四種,中間以破我一段轉身,接著把胎兒從羯剌藍寫到出生、寫到「復起煩惱積集諸業」,一路推回下一期中有。圓圈一合,十二支就順勢立起來了。前半是實況,後半是分段表;同一件事,先看見,再算清。
一句話:中有不是生死之外的第三者,是這一期業所牽引之身的前段——認清這一點,十二支就不是十二個名詞,而是同一條相續上的十二段路。
位置(先立)
本卷即玄奘卷九,起於中有的諸門分別。此界不靠承轉套語為徵,靠的是三家分卷——光記、寶疏、頌疏各自分卷而界與玄奘全同,三重重合。三家在此標科亦不約而同:光記與頌疏皆數十一門,寶疏則以頌為單位作「五頌義門」。另須先記一事:神泰疏是殘本,世品五卷全闕,本卷無泰疏一字可繫,所以此卷之鏡只有三疏。
三個眼目
-
同一個業,牽兩重身。中有與當來那一身是同一業所引,所以「如當本有形」——光記把這一層說成如印所印、文像不殊。這一句是全卷的地基:正因為同一業,中有之滅才不另立死有,中有之趣才「一切種力皆不能轉」,五趣中有同居一腹才「非互觸燒,業所遮故」。而它的另一面同樣要緊——中有極細,細到「如不可見亦不可觸」,而無對、業通最疾、以香為食,論皆另立其門、各出其由,不同出於「細」之一字。
-
每一支都是五蘊,名字只是那一位最勝者的代表。這是分位緣起的命門。論說「若位中無明最勝,此位五蘊總名無明」,並設喻——如說王行,非無導從,只因王最勝而總謂王行。認清這一條,十二支的一切難處就都鬆了:識以「正結生時,一剎那位」定界,名色以「結生識後、六處生前」定界,六處才以「眼等已生,至根境識未和合位」定界;『該說四處生前而言六』是據滿立名;後際只用生與老死兩個名字,是因為它裝的正是中際四支的重演。可是就在這一頌上,論主著了「傳許」二字——通篇判自宗多用直陳,此處卻留了一道裂縫。眾賢《順正理》讀作「經主不信說傳許言」,《顯宗論》索性把頌改成「佛依分位說」;頌疏另從一路獨立注出「分位緣起,經部有破,論主意明,故言傳許」。而真諦舊譯此處逕作直陳,全無語氣詞。四線材料交會一處,並錄不判。
-
十二支是一帖藥,不是一張宇宙圖。經為什麼只說有情?頌答得極短:「於前後中際,為遣他愚惑」。三際之愚的十個問句,每一句主詞都是「我」——所謂三際之愚,其實只是我執在時間三段上的三種樣子。論從不正面回答那個『我是什麼』,它只是把十二支擺出來,讓提問的前提自行瓦解。所以《品類足論》說緣起通一切有為而經只說有情,二者不衝突——「素怛纜言因別意趣,阿毘達磨依法相說」。凡讀法數,先問它為誰而立、對治什麼,這一卷示範了最清楚的一次。
一義(附):緣起是有為,還是無為
有人引經證緣起是無為法——「如來出世若不出世,如是緣起法性常住」。論主不破經,只分兩種讀法:若意在說行等恆緣無明等而起、非緣餘法或無緣,故說常住,這一讀「理則可然」;若意在另立一個湛然常住的法體叫作緣起,這一讀「理則不然」,因為「生起俱是有為相故」,而且「又起必應依起者立」——一個與無明等毫不相干的常法,憑什麼說是依它們而立的緣起。
值得特別記一筆的是:眾賢在《順正理》中對這一段,不是反破,而是同調並更申之——他同樣判「由此意說,理亦可然」,同樣說「若說別法名為緣起,如擇滅等是凝然常,此必不然」,還多出一組三句式把對方的三種可能逐一堵死。系內對辯不等於逐處對立,這一條是最好的提醒。
通於全卷
本卷把同一批支切了五次:十二支是一種切法,三際是第二種,前後二分是第三種,惑業事是第四種,因與果是第五種。切法一換,看見的東西就換一樣——三際看見的是生命的段落,惑業事看見的是『煩惱造業、業生事、事又起煩惱』的閉環,因果看見的是同一支的兩面(「諸支因分說名緣起」「諸支果分說緣已生」,如父子之名,隨所觀而異)。而末後那一段順經義之釋,又把十二支重走一遍,改用可觀的流程來說。
阿毘達磨算得這樣細,理由就在這裡:同一批事實換軸重排,才記得住、用得上。至於流轉的起點與終點,論已交代明白——生死「決定無初,然有後邊由因盡故」,因為「如種滅壞芽必不生」。一部世品談盡三界五趣,落腳處只是這一句。
The previous fascicle proved that intermediate existence really exists; this one asks straight out, “To which destiny will it go, and what appearance has the intermediate existence that arises?” — first exhausting the marks of intermediate existence gate by gate, next analyzing the four modes of entry into the womb, turning midway upon a passage that refutes the self, and then writing the embryo from the kalala through to birth and on to “he again arouses the afflictions and accumulates actions,” pressing the whole way round to the intermediate existence of the next term. The circle once closed, the twelve links stand up of themselves. The first half is the state of things as it is, the second half a table of divided stages; one and the same matter, first seen and then reckoned clear.
In one sentence: Intermediate existence is no third party outside death and birth; it is the front stretch of the very body that this term’s action draws forth — and once that is seen, the twelve links are not twelve nouns but twelve stretches of road upon one and the same continuum.
Placement (established first)
This fascicle is Xuanzang’s Fascicle Nine, and it begins from the distinctions through the several gates concerning intermediate existence. This boundary is not attested by any formula of transition; it is attested by the fascicle divisions of the three commentaries — Puguang’s Record, Fabao’s Commentary, and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary each divide their fascicles independently, and their boundaries agree throughout with Xuanzang’s, a threefold coincidence. The three also mark their outlines here without prior agreement: Puguang’s Record and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary both count eleven gates, while Fabao’s Commentary takes the stanza for its unit and gives “five stanzas of gates of meaning.” One further thing must be recorded first: Shentai’s Commentary is a fragmentary text, the five fascicles of the Chapter on the World being wholly wanting, and for this fascicle there is not one word of Shentai’s to attach — so the mirror of this fascicle is of three commentaries only.
Three Points to Watch
-
One and the same action draws forth two bodies. Intermediate existence and that coming body are drawn forth by one and the same action, and so it “has the shape of the coming basic existence” — Puguang’s Record puts this layer as a seal and what the seal impresses, the figure and the image not differing. This one sentence is the ground of the whole fascicle: it is just because the action is the same that the cessation of intermediate existence has no death-existence separately established for it, that the destiny of intermediate existence is such that “no power of any kind whatever can turn it,” and that the intermediate existences of the five destinies, dwelling together in one belly, “do not touch and burn one another, being shut off by action.” And its other side matters just as much — intermediate existence is exceedingly subtle, subtle to the point of being such that “as it cannot be seen, neither can it be touched”; yet nonresistance, the swiftest supernormal power of action, and feeding upon fragrance are each established by the treatise as a gate of its own with its own reason given, and they do not all issue from the single word “subtle.”
-
Every link is the five aggregates, and the name is only the representative of whatever is most eminent at that stage. This is the vital point of dependent origination by stages. The treatise says, “if at a given stage ignorance is the most eminent, the five aggregates of that stage are named ignorance as a whole,” and sets up a simile — as when one says the king goes forth, it is not that there are no outriders and retinue; it is only because the king is the most eminent that the whole is called the king’s going forth. Once this is seen, every hard place in the twelve links loosens: consciousness has its boundary fixed by “at the very moment of rebirth-linking, the stage of a single instant”; name-and-form by “after the consciousness of rebirth-linking and before the six sense fields arise”; and the six sense fields only by “from when the eye and the rest have arisen up to the stage where faculty, object, and consciousness have not yet met.” That ‘it ought to say before four sense fields arise, and yet says six’ is a naming on the basis of completeness; and that the later period uses only the two names birth and aging-and-death is because what it holds is precisely a second performance of the four links of the middle period. Yet upon this very stanza the author has set the two words “transmitted and allowed” — throughout the treatise he adjudicates his own school’s sense mostly by plain statement, and here he has left a fissure. Saṅghabhadra’s Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle reads it as “the Sūtra-master does not believe it and so says ‘transmitted and allowed’”; the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine simply alters the stanza to read “the Buddha spoke with reference to stages”; and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary, coming by an independent road, notes that “dependent origination by stages is refuted by the Sautrāntikas, and the author’s intent is plain, and so he says ‘transmitted and allowed.’” Paramārtha’s old translation, for its part, makes a plain statement here with no modal word whatever. Four lines of material meet at one place, and they are recorded together without adjudication.
-
The twelve links are a dose of medicine, not a map of the universe. Why does scripture speak of sentient beings alone? The stanza answers very shortly: “in the earlier, the later, and the middle period, in order to dispel another’s bewilderment.” Of the ten questions that make up the bewilderment over the three periods, every one has “I” for its subject — what is called bewilderment over the three periods is in truth only three shapes taken by the grasping of self across three stretches of time. The treatise never answers head-on that question ‘what is the self?’; it merely sets out the twelve links and lets the premise of the question fall apart of itself. And so the Treatise on Categories of Dharmas says that dependent origination runs through all that is conditioned while scripture speaks only of sentient beings, and the two do not conflict — “the sūtrānta speaks with a particular intent, while the Abhidharma states things according to the marks of dharmas.” Whenever one reads a numbered set of dharmas, one should first ask for whom it was established and what it counteracts; and this fascicle gives the clearest demonstration of that.
One Further Point (Appended): Is Dependent Origination Conditioned or Unconditioned?
Someone adduces scripture to prove that dependent origination is an unconditioned dharma — “whether a Tathāgata appears in the world or does not appear, such is the abiding constancy of the dharma-nature of dependent origination.” The author does not refute the scripture; he only separates two readings of it. If the intent is to say that the formations and the rest constantly arise with ignorance and the rest for their condition, and not with any other dharma for condition nor with no condition at all, and that it is for this that abiding constancy is spoken of, then on this reading “the principle may be granted.” But if the intent is to establish besides this a limpidly abiding entity of a dharma and call it dependent origination, then on that reading “the principle may not be granted” — because “arising and origination are both marks of the conditioned,” and further because “origination must be established in dependence upon what originates”: a constant dharma with no relation whatever to ignorance and the rest, on what ground is it to be called the dependent origination established in dependence upon them?
One thing here deserves a particular entry: upon this very passage Saṅghabhadra, in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, does not counter-refute but is of one accord and carries the point further — he likewise adjudicates that “said with this intent, the principle may indeed be granted,” likewise says that “if a separate dharma is called dependent origination, congealed and constant like cessation through discernment and the rest, this certainly cannot be granted,” and adds besides a threefold formula that blocks off the opponent’s three possibilities one by one. Debate within the lineage does not amount to opposition at every point, and this item is the best reminder of it.
Through the whole fascicle
This fascicle cuts one and the same set of links five times over: the twelve links are one cut, the three periods a second, the division into earlier and later a third, afflictions-actions-entities a fourth, and cause and result a fifth. Change the cut and what is seen changes with it — the three periods show the segments of a life; afflictions, actions, and entities show the closed ring of ‘the afflictions make action, action produces entities, and entities again arouse the afflictions’; cause and result show the two faces of one and the same link (“the cause-portion of the links is called dependent origination,” “the result-portion of the links is called what has already arisen from conditions” — like the names father and son, differing with what is being regarded). And that last passage of explanation conforming to the sense of the scripture walks the twelve links once more, this time as a process that can be watched.
Abhidharma reckons so finely for just this reason: only when one and the same set of facts is rearranged on a second axis can it be remembered and put to use. As for the starting point and the end point of the turning, the treatise has stated it plainly — birth and death “definitely have no beginning, yet they have a final limit, because the cause is exhausted,” for “as when the seed is destroyed the sprout certainly does not grow.” A whole Chapter on the World that talks through the three realms and the five destinies comes to rest on just this one sentence.
緣起別釋·四有·四食Dependent Origination in Detail · The Four Existences · The Four Nutriments
全文五層 →Full five layers →十二支之總相既畢,論主回頭只拆四支——無明、名、觸、受;其餘八支明言「餘已說當說」,各歸本品。四支拆完,以八種外喻物象收十二支為煩惱、業、果事三類;次辨四有之染淨;再問一句「是諸有情由何而住」,開出全卷最長的四食一段;末辨死生之識與受,收於三聚。前半辨名,後半辨事。
一句話:這一卷把『有情為什麼還在』拆成兩個問題——靠什麼支撐(四食),靠什麼接續(四有與死生之心);而支撐與接續一旦講清楚,斷處在哪裡也就清楚了。
位置(先立)
本卷即世品卷十全,起於「無明何義」,止於三聚。開卷無承轉套語,逕以支名設問——這在全論中少見,正因為它接的是上一卷未竟之工。三疏於此界所標之科各異而所指同一段:光記標為別明名義,寶疏標為釋十二支名義並明列四支之目,頌疏標為別明四法與別指餘文。三家獨立分卷而卷界與玄奘全同;真諦本則於此段中途另起一卷,二譯之分卷全然不對應。
三個眼目
-
「無明」不是一個空缺。論主開卷連設三難,把「體非明」「明無」兩條路都逼到絕處,然後只用十個字定案——「明所治無明,如非親實等」。怨敵之為非親友,不是『不在親友之列』,而是『與親友相違』;虛誑之為非實,不是『真話以外的一切話』,而是被真話所對治的那一種。這一字之辨守的是一條硬線:能作緣的必須是有體之法,否則十二支第一環就懸空。緊接的第二頌下,異計一方也舉了一個最好記的比喻來反挫這一線——「如惡妻子名無妻子」:壞妻子既無妻子之德便得「無妻子」之名,故壞智慧亦「應名無明」。論主不受此喻,只用一句斷之——「彼非無明有是見故」。
-
凡數目皆須三判具足。十八意近行看似三乘六,論主卻先把三種單獨的算法一一否掉:只依自性得三,只依相應得一,只依所緣得六。「此成十八,具足由三」——三個判準缺一,這個數就不成立。這是阿毘達磨立數的通則,也是讀者最該養成的習慣:見到一個數,先問它由幾個判準交叉而成。而緊接在成就清單之後,論主忽然自陳「然我所見經義有殊」,主張唯雜染者方名近行——這一句引出全卷最大的一樁公案。
-
「食」的定義不是入口之物,是能令有情住的東西。經說世尊「自悟一法正覺正說」,即一切有情無非由食而住;食有四種——段、觸、思、識。段食之體是香味觸三塵而非那一團食物,且唯繫欲界;色所以不算食,因為它「不能益自所對根」,且解脫者見美食而無益。四食的分工極整齊:前二食養此世的身與心,後二食引起當來之有,論主用一個現成的比喻收之——「前二如養母,養已生故;後二如生母,生未生故」。生死之所以相續,靠的是四道供給線;解脫者從第一條線上先鬆手。
一義(附):一段沒有判決的辯論,與一樁四家去取各異的公案
本卷有兩處長行遠遠超出其所繫之頌。其一是觸受同時之辯,九百餘字,中途被逼出一句極尖銳的話——「我等但以契經為量,本論非量」——爭的已經不是觸受先後,而是阿毘達磨本論有沒有量的資格。論錄完全場而以有部一造之結收之,末後說「傍論已終,應辯本義」,不宣布勝負。
其二是十八意近行處世親的自陳異說。眾賢於順正理中標為「假為異說」而破之,末斷毘婆沙所說為善;顯宗論則全略此段。真諦舊譯獨立收有此段之對應文,可證其為本有之文。而漢傳三疏之中,唯寶疏收錄並援眾賢之破入疏,且明標「第三論主假為異說破有部也」,光記、頌疏則各自釋此異說而不及眾賢之破。同一段公案,四家各為一種去取——本帙並錄,勝負不判。
通於全卷
八種外喻物象是這一卷最好記的部分,也是最實用的部分:龍鎮池水喻煩惱之持續,草根剪而復生喻煩惱之難拔,糠裹米喻煩惱之為業之助伴,草藥果熟喻業之了結,熟飲食喻果報之不再生果報。末一喻不是修辭,是解脫之所以可能的邏輯保證——果報若能再感果報,鏈條就沒有斷點。
全卷收於三聚,而三聚不是善惡的評分,是就『去向是否已定』而分:聖者定正,造無間者定邪,其餘皆不定——「正邪定餘,名不定性。彼待二緣,可成二故」。大多數人正在那個「待二緣」的位置上。一部講世間的品,最後把整個世間按還能不能改重排一次隊,然後停筆——這是它留給讀者的出口。
The general character of the twelve links being finished, the author turns back and takes apart four links only — ignorance, name, contact, and feeling; of the remaining eight he says expressly that they “have been stated or will be stated,” each returning to its own chapter. The four links taken apart, he gathers the twelve into the three kinds of affliction, action, and the matter of results by means of eight external similes; next he distinguishes the defiled from the undefiled among the four existences; then he asks one question, “upon what do these sentient beings depend to abide?”, and out of it opens the longest passage of the fascicle, on the four nutriments; and at the end he analyzes which consciousness and which feeling belong to death and birth, closing with the three classes. The first half distinguishes names, the second half distinguishes things.
In one sentence: This fascicle takes the question “why is a sentient being still here?” apart into two — what holds it up (the four nutriments) and what carries it on (the four existences and the mind at death and birth); and once holding up and carrying on have been made plain, where the break falls is plain as well.
Placement (established first)
This fascicle is the whole of Fascicle Ten of the Chapter on the World, beginning at “what is the sense of ignorance?” and stopping at the three classes. It opens with no transitional formula whatever, setting its question directly by the name of a link — a rare thing in the whole treatise, and precisely because what it takes up is work the preceding fascicle left unfinished. At this boundary the three commentaries mark the division each in its own words while pointing at one and the same passage: Puguang’s Record marks it as the separate explanation of names and senses, Fabao’s Commentary as the explanation of the names and senses of the twelve links with the four links expressly listed, Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary as the separate explanation of four dharmas together with the separate reference to the remaining text. The three divide their fascicles independently and yet their boundary is wholly the same as Xuanzang’s; Paramārtha’s version, on the other hand, begins a fascicle of its own midway through this passage, and the fascicle divisions of the two translations do not correspond at all.
Three Points to Watch
-
“Ignorance” is not an empty gap. As the fascicle opens the author sets three objections in a row, pressing both roads — “its entity is not clear knowing” and “the absence of clear knowing” — to their dead ends, and then settles the matter in ten characters: “ignorance is what clear knowing counteracts, as with ‘not a kinsman,’ ‘not true,’ and the rest.” An enemy is “not a friend and kinsman” not because he falls outside the list of friends and kinsmen but because he stands opposed to them; deceitful speech is “not true” not because it is any speech whatever besides true speech but because it is the kind that true speech counteracts. What this discrimination of a single word guards is one hard line: whatever can act as a condition must be a dharma possessed of an entity, and otherwise the first ring of the twelve links hangs in the air. Immediately under the second stanza the party of the divergent reckoning brings out the most memorable of similes to blunt that line — “a bad wife or child is called having no wife or child”: a bad wife, lacking the virtues a wife should have, gets the name “no wife,” and so bad discernment, lacking the virtue of clear knowing, “ought likewise to be named ignorance.” The author does not accept the simile and cuts it off with a single sentence: “that is not ignorance, because there is view in it.”
-
Every number must have all three criteria complete. The eighteen mental proximate-activities look like three times six, yet the author first strikes out one by one the three ways of counting taken singly: by intrinsic nature alone one gets three, by association alone one gets one, by object alone one gets six. “These come to eighteen, complete by three” — let one of the three criteria be missing and the number does not stand. This is the general rule by which Abhidharma establishes numbers, and it is the habit a reader most ought to form: when a number is met with, first ask by how many criteria crossing one another it was made. And immediately after the list of what is accomplished, the author suddenly declares of himself, “yet the sense of the sūtras as I see it is otherwise,” holding that only what is defiled is named a proximate activity — and that one sentence draws out the largest case in the whole fascicle.
-
The definition of “nutriment” is not what goes in at the mouth but what can make a sentient being abide. The sūtra says that the World-Honored One “awakened of himself to one dharma and rightly awakened to it and rightly stated it,” namely that no sentient being whatever does not abide by nutriment; and nutriment is of four kinds — morsel, contact, volition, and consciousness. The entity of morsel nutriment is the three sense objects of odor, taste, and the tangible and not that lump of food, and it is bound to the desire realm alone. Form is not counted as nutriment because it “cannot benefit the faculty it faces,” and because one who is liberated sees fine food and takes no benefit from it. The division of labor among the four nutriments is exceedingly neat: the first two nourish the body and the mind of this present life, the latter two draw forth and raise up the existence that is to come, and the author closes with a ready-made simile — “the first two are like the mother who rears, since they rear what has been born; the latter two are like the mother who bears, since they bring to birth what has not been born.” Birth and death continue because four supply lines feed them; the one who is liberated lets go of the first line first.
One Further Point (Appended): A Debate That Reaches No Verdict, and a Case in Which Four Authorities Each Chose Differently
Two passages of prose commentary in this fascicle run far beyond the stanzas to which they are attached. The first is the debate on whether contact and feeling are simultaneous, over nine hundred characters, in the course of which one extremely sharp sentence is forced out — “we take the sūtras alone as our measure; the root treatise is not a measure” — so that what is at issue is no longer whether contact precedes feeling but whether the Abhidharma root treatise has any standing as a measure at all. The treatise records the whole scene and closes it with the conclusion of the Sarvāstivāda side alone, saying at the end that “the incidental discussion is over; the proper sense should be analyzed” — and it declares no victory or defeat.
The second is Vasubandhu’s own declaration of a divergent account at the eighteen mental proximate-activities. In the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle Saṅghabhadra marks it as “provisionally putting forward a divergent account” and refutes it, ruling at the end that what the Mahāvibhāṣā says is the better; the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine omits the whole passage. Paramārtha’s older translation alone carries the corresponding text of this passage, which proves it to be text the original treatise had. And among the three Han commentaries only Fabao’s Commentary records it and draws Saṅghabhadra’s refutation into the commentary as well, expressly marking it “third, the author provisionally puts forward a divergent account in order to refute the Sarvāstivādins,” while Puguang’s Record and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary each explain the divergent account without touching Saṅghabhadra’s refutation. One and the same case, and four authorities each with a choice of his own — this collection records them together and does not adjudicate between them.
Through the whole fascicle
The eight external similes are the part of this fascicle easiest to remember and also the most useful: the dragon that holds down the water of the pool for the persistence of afflictions, the grass root cut and growing again for how hard afflictions are to pull up, the husk wrapping the rice for the affliction as the action’s helper, the medicinal herb whose fruit is ripe for the finishing of an action, cooked food for the result of maturation that produces no further result of maturation. The last simile is not rhetoric but the logical guarantee that liberation is possible — if a result of maturation could call forth a further result of maturation, the chain would have no break in it.
The whole fascicle closes with the three classes, and the three classes are not a grading of good and evil but a division by whether one’s direction is already fixed: the noble are fixed in rightness, those who commit the deeds of immediate retribution are fixed in wrongness, and all the rest are indeterminate — “what is other than fixed in rightness and fixed in wrongness is named of indeterminate nature, since these await two conditions and may become either of the two.” Most people are standing in that position of “awaiting two conditions.” A chapter that speaks of the world ends by drawing the whole world up once more in ranks according to whether it can still be changed, and then lays down the pen — this is the way out that it leaves its readers.
器世間·身量·壽量The Receptacle World · Bodily Measure · Lifespan
全文五層 →Full five layers →有情世間既訖,論主一句「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」轉身講外器。自下而上:風輪水輪金輪三層底座、九山八海、四大洲與八中洲、黑山無熱池;再往下探八熱八寒與十六增,再往上循日月、妙高四層級、三十三天以至有色諸天;末以三千大千收其廣,以身量、壽量、中夭收其久。八目一圖,兩表一收。
一句話:這一卷把一個世界從最下一層排到最上一層、從最短的十年排到八萬劫——而通篇沒有一位建築師,只有一句反覆出現的「諸有情業增上力」。
位置(先立)
本卷之界是全品最強的一道科界:論文自標「器世間今當說」,三家古德在此各自分卷而界線全同,光記、寶疏、頌疏皆判為世品全體的大文第二。器世間之下三分——所居器、能居量、三分齊;本卷占前二分,第三分屬下一卷。所居器再細分八目(三輪、九山、八海、四洲、黑山等、地獄、日月、天器),三家所標亦全同。真諦舊譯此段作「器世界」而不作「器世間」,且其世間品只分四卷,本卷所對之段橫跨其兩卷之界。
三個眼目
-
世界不是誰造的,是共業感的。風輪從虛空生起,是「諸有情業增上力」;水上結金、眾寶生成、日月不墜繞山而行,一律是它。連四洲的形狀與四洲人的臉相應——「隨其洲相人面亦然」——也是這條線的證據:器與有情同出一份共業,不是兩套東西。所以讀這一卷的第一步,是把『誰造的』換成『誰的業感的』;這一換,滿卷的數字才落到修行的帳上。也正因如此,本卷順手破了數論的『轉變』一義:有部說因滅果生、體不俱有,數論說體常而相變,論主一句斷之——「即是此物而不如此,如是言義曾所未聞」。
-
量表的骨架是換單位,不是堆數字。四洲人身量從東洲起倍增,欲天以俱盧舍等差、色天先等差後等比而中間「唯無雲減三踰繕那」——論未給其由,光記並存數解;壽量則先立天上的晝夜(人間五十年為最下一天的一晝夜),再以天壽為地獄的一晝夜。同一個手法用了三次。天處相去之量更省——「如彼去下量,去上數亦然」,一句話取代二十二個數字。而數目大到無感時,論就改用譬喻:寒地獄之壽以百年取一粒胡麻顯其「難盡」,不給定值。凡遇一串規則忽然出現例外,先驗算首尾;凡遇譬喻取代數字,那正是數已越出可感之處。
-
異說之多,恰是誠實的痕跡。水為何不流散,二說;地獄如何排列,三說;三十三天頂量,八萬與二萬並存;天宮依處之量,四說並列。器世間的細節多半經無明文,論多錄異說而不判;但須逐段辨認「理實」「此義無定」一類判語——所以讀本卷要先學會分辨哪一句是論的正說、哪一句是所錄的別說。真正被定死的不是地圖,是每一處『何業感何果』的對應。而論主標「應思」「此義無定」「諸軌範師於此二門俱許無失」處,是他自己劃出的未收束之處,不是缺口。
一義(附):三十三天山頂那一組相反的數字
玄奘頌本主張山頂每邊八萬,而以「四邊各唯二萬」為餘師之說;真諦偈本卻主張每邊二萬,反以八萬為餘師之說。同一組數字,二本的正說與餘師說恰好對調——這不是譯語之異,是二本所承頌文的異讀之異,二譯各自忠實其所據底本。光記還替持二萬之說把算式補了出來,說四層級「漸次却入侵山體成」,一層層向內收,到頂只剩每邊二萬。並錄不判。
通於全卷
本卷最後一段值得回頭再讀。滿卷數字鋪陳到極處之後,論說「諸處壽量皆有中夭」,隨即補一層:「此約處說,非別有情,有別有情不中夭故」——就處所說是一回事,就個人說是另一回事。不中夭的那幾類人是誰?待成佛的一生所繫菩薩、最後有者、佛所記者、佛所使者、隨信行者、隨法行者,以及懷菩薩胎與懷輪王胎的母親。他們的共同點是身上有一件未了之事。
於是這幅世界圖有了一個出口:一切處所的壽量都可以逐格記帳,而擔著必成之事的人不受這張表的支配。從最下的風輪到最上的色究竟,從十年到八萬劫,全卷所量的是器與身;末後這一句所指的,是量表之外。
The world of sentient beings being finished, the author turns with a single sentence — “Thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated” — and speaks of the outer receptacle. From the bottom upward: the three-tiered base of wind circle, water circle, and golden circle; the nine mountains and the eight seas; the four great continents and the eight intermediate continents; the black mountains and the Lake Without Heat; then downward to the eight hot and the eight cold hells and the sixteen Increases; then upward along the sun and moon, the four terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, and so on to the gods possessed of form; at the end the three-thousandfold great thousand gathers up its breadth, and bodily measure, lifespan, and untimely death gather up its length. Eight headings make one map; two tables make one close.
In one sentence: This fascicle sets a world in order from its lowest tier to its highest and from the shortest span of ten years to eighty thousand aeons — and through the whole of it there is no architect, only one sentence recurring again and again, “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings.”
Placement (established first)
The boundary of this fascicle is the strongest outline boundary in the whole chapter: the text marks itself with “the receptacle world is now to be stated,” and the three ancient masters each divide their fascicles here with boundaries exactly alike, Puguang’s Record, Fabao’s Commentary, and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary all judging it the second major division of the chapter on the world as a whole. Beneath the receptacle world there are three parts — the receptacle dwelt in, the measure of those who can dwell, and the divisions of the least measures; this fascicle occupies the first two, and the third belongs to the next. The receptacle dwelt in divides further into eight headings (the three circles, the nine mountains, the eight seas, the four continents, the black mountains and the rest, the hells, the sun and moon, and the receptacles of the gods), and here too the three masters mark them alike. Paramārtha’s older translation writes this passage as “the receptacle world-sphere” and not “the receptacle world,” and his chapter on the world is divided into four fascicles only, so that the passage answering to this one straddles the boundary between two of his.
Three Points to Watch
-
The world is not made by anyone; it is called forth by shared action. The wind circle arises out of space by “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings”; gold congealing upon the water, the several gems coming into being, the sun and moon not falling but circling the mountain — all of it is that same force. Even the correspondence between the shapes of the four continents and the faces of the people who live upon them — “as the continent has its shape, so likewise the faces of its people” — is evidence on this same line: the receptacle and sentient beings issue from one and the same shared action and are not two separate sets of things. So the first step in reading this fascicle is to put “whose action called it forth” in place of “who made it”; and once that is done, the numbers that fill the fascicle fall onto the ledger of practice. It is for just this reason that the fascicle refutes in passing the Sāṃkhya sense of “transmutation”: the Sarvāstivādins say that the cause ceases and the result arises and their entities do not exist together, while the Sāṃkhya say that the entity is permanent and its characteristics change; and the author settles it in one sentence — “that it should be this very thing and yet not be thus: such a statement I have never heard.”
-
The skeleton of the tables is a change of unit, not a heap of numbers. The bodily measure of the people of the four continents doubles from the eastern continent onward; the gods of desire increase by a constant difference reckoned in krośas, while the gods of form increase first by a constant difference and then by a constant ratio, with “only the Anabhraka subtracting three yojanas” in the middle — for which the treatise gives no reason and Puguang’s Record keeps several explanations side by side. For lifespan, the day and night of the heavens are established first (fifty human years being one day and night of the lowest heaven), and then the lifespan of a heaven is made one day and night of a hell. One and the same device is used three times. The measures of distance between the places of the gods are more economical still — “as is a heaven’s measure of distance downward, so likewise is its number upward” — one sentence in place of twenty-two figures. And when a number grows too great to be felt, the treatise turns to simile instead: the lifespan of the cold hells is shown to be “hard to exhaust” by taking away one sesame seed every hundred years, with no fixed value given. Whenever an exception suddenly appears in a run of regular values, verify the two ends first; and whenever a simile takes the place of a number, that is exactly where the count has passed beyond what can be felt.
-
The abundance of divergent accounts is precisely the mark of honesty. Why the water does not flow away: two accounts. How the hells are arranged: three. The measure of the summit of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three: eighty thousand and twenty thousand stand side by side. The measure of the supports of the heavenly palaces: four accounts listed together. For most of the details of the receptacle world the scriptures have no express text, and the treatise records divergent accounts for the most part without adjudicating them; yet one must recognize, passage by passage, such verdict-words as “in truth of principle” and “this sense is not settled” — so that reading this fascicle begins with learning to tell which sentence is the treatise’s own position and which is a separate account that it merely records. What is fixed beyond change is not the map but the correspondence, at every single point, of “which action calls forth which result.” And where the author writes “it should be pondered,” “this sense is not settled,” and “the preceptors allow both gates without fault,” those are places he has himself marked as not yet brought to a close, and are not gaps.
One Further Point (Appended): The Opposed Pair of Numbers at the Summit of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three
Xuanzang’s stanza text holds that each side of the summit is eighty thousand and gives “each of the four sides is only twenty thousand” as the account of other masters; Paramārtha’s verse text, on the contrary, holds that each side is twenty thousand and gives eighty thousand as the account of other masters. With one and the same pair of figures, what is the position and what is the account of other masters are exactly interchanged between the two versions — this is not a difference of rendering but a difference in the variant readings of the stanza text that each version received, each translator being faithful to the base text before him. Puguang’s Record even supplies, on behalf of the account holding twenty thousand, the reckoning that lies behind it, saying that the four terraces are formed “by cutting successively inward into the body of the mountain,” drawing in tier by tier, so that at the summit only twenty thousand a side is left. Both are recorded without adjudication.
Through the whole fascicle
The last passage of this fascicle deserves a second reading. After the numbers that fill it have been set out to their utmost, the treatise says that “in every place the lifespan admits of untimely death,” and at once adds a further layer: “this is said with respect to place and not with respect to particular sentient beings, for there are particular sentient beings who do not die untimely” — what holds of a place is one thing, what holds of a person another. Who are the several classes that do not die untimely? The bodhisattva bound to one more birth who awaits buddhahood, one in his last existence, one to whom the Buddha has given prediction, one whom the Buddha has sent, one who follows through faith, one who follows the dharma, and the mothers who carry a bodhisattva in the womb and who carry a wheel-turning monarch in the womb. What they have in common is that each carries about him a matter not yet finished.
So this map of the world is given an exit: the lifespan of every place can be entered in the ledger square by square, and yet one who bears a matter that must be brought to completion is not governed by that table. From the wind circle lowest down to the Akaniṣṭha highest up, from ten years to eighty thousand aeons, what the whole fascicle measures is the receptacle and the body; what its last sentence points to lies outside the table of measures.
極少量·年劫·三災The Least Measures · Years and Aeons · The Three Catastrophes
全文五層 →Full five layers →世品的最後一卷不再問『有什麼』,改問『用什麼量』。前四卷用踰繕那量空間、用年量時間,兩把尺都用過了,卻從未交代它們自己的最小刻度。這一卷從三極少(極微·字·剎那)起手,一路推到七倍遞增的長度表、剎那到年的時間表、四劫、大劫、三劫阿僧企耶,再往下說佛與獨覺出世的時窗、輪王、劫初有情的墮落、小三災與大三災——一部毘曇的『量度篇』。
一句話:從不可再分的極微,到八十中劫合成的大劫,量的是同一件事——「劫性是何?謂唯五蘊」;尺伸到再遠,所量的始終是身心諸法,不是別的什麼東西。
三個眼目
-
一把尺的兩端。極微是往下析到不能再析的下限,大劫是往上積到八十中劫的上限;中間用七倍遞增把肉眼可見的隙遊塵一路接到不可見的極微,又用一百二十、六十、三十把剎那一路接到年。下端靠析法、上端靠積法,而兩端都掛在可經驗處——下端掛在窗隙的浮塵,上端掛在人壽的增減(「一切劫增無過八萬,一切劫減唯極十年」)。這一手是讀阿毘達磨數表的通則:凡數必有一頭落在經驗上,否則就只是數。而本卷之末,這把尺自己也被收回——三災之力「乃至極微亦無餘在」,所量的下限本身也在所壞之中。
-
時間不是容器。整卷把時間鋪得極長極密,而論主在四劫算完之後只插一問:「劫性是何?謂唯五蘊」。劫不是盛裝諸法的器皿,只是五蘊在時間上的一段相續。這一問是全卷的樞紐——沒有它,八十中劫就變成一個宇宙論的框架;有了它,整套時間表就是法數的展開。同樣的收束也出現在末尾:第四靜慮三災不及,「由此佛說彼名不動」,可是有人一問『那它豈不是常』,論立刻答「不爾,與有情俱生俱滅故」。在最上一層也不留一個常住的例外,這條線比任何數字都要緊。
-
災之所及,以自身之動為度。三災為什麼只到第二、第三、第四靜慮為頂?論的答案不在外面,在裡面:初靜慮尋伺為內災,故外遭火;第二靜慮喜受為內災、潤身如水,故外遭水;第三靜慮動息為內災、息即是風,故外遭風;第四靜慮三者俱離,故無外災可及。這與壞劫一節「非他地災能壞他地」是同一條原理——災之能壞某地,靠的是同類相引,不是蔓延。落到修行上只有一句:外境安穩到哪一級,恰與內心寂止到哪一級相應;而災來時之上遷,三洲與諸天以定為門——唯北洲例外,彼是壽盡而生欲天,不由定;壞劫之際,有情多是一層一層靠禪定往上遷移的。
一義(附):那一口地味
劫初的人身帶光明、以喜樂為食。有一人稟性耽味,取嘗便食,餘人隨學——「爾時方名初受段食」。此後是一條不斷的鏈:身漸堅重、光明隱沒,於是才有日月;貪味遞增,於是地味、地餅、林藤、香稻一級一級退去;食粗而有殘穢,於是生二道、生男女根、生非理作意;有人稟性懶惰而多取貯積,於是生我所心、分田、吝護、侵奪,劫盜由此起;為防賊而雇人守田而封為田主,王與剎帝利之名由此立;別有厭居家、樂空閑而精修戒行者,因斯得婆羅門之名;後王不能均給,行刑罰而殺害起,罪人覆藏其過而虛誑語起。
到小三災一節,論回頭把這條長鏈收成八個字——「故諸災患二法為本:一耽美食、二性嬾惰」。世界的敗壞不是外來的,它的第一因遠在最初那一口地味與那一次多取。 對治也照樣輕小:一晝一夜持不殺戒、以一顆藥果或一摶食殷淨心奉施僧眾——因與果都在心上,所以下手處也在心上。
通於全論
「極微」在此立為色之下限,往後論色法之假實、論和合與和集,都要回到這一卷的定義;而本卷末破外道極微常的那一長段,用的正是『拿還沒成立的東西作能立』一路,是全論少見的一段護法文字。「三劫阿僧企耶」在此被說明為一個確定的位數而非誇飾——「非無數言,顯不可數」,並誠實記下「於此數中忘失餘八」;隨之而來的四問四答,把菩薩肯用這個數的理由講在悲心上——「菩薩濟物遂己悲心,故以濟他即為己益」,這是世品裡唯一一段在量心而不在量世界的文字。「不動」一名在此立,往後定品說四靜慮之差別、說第四靜慮何以最堪為依,其根即在這裡。而「法爾後壞,必最初成」這條成壞對稱律,則是往後一切劫算之底本——本卷收尾以《施設足》的遍淨天壽六十四劫作一次驗算,正是這套算法自己交出的成績。
The last fascicle of the Chapter on the World no longer asks “what is there” but “by what is it measured.” The four preceding fascicles measured space by the yojana and time by the year; both rules had been used, and yet the smallest graduation of either was never stated. This fascicle sets out from the three least measures (the ultimate atom · the letter · the moment) and runs on through the table of lengths increasing sevenfold at every step, the table of times from the moment to the year, the four aeons, the great aeon, the three asaṃkhyeya aeons, and then further to the window of time in which buddhas and pratyekabuddhas appear, the wheel-turning monarch, the fall of the sentient beings at the beginning of an aeon, and the three lesser and the three great catastrophes — the book of measures of an Abhidharma treatise.
In one sentence: From the ultimate atom that cannot be divided further to the great aeon made up of eighty intermediate aeons, one and the same thing is being measured — “What is the nature of an aeon? It is the five aggregates alone”; however far the rule is extended, what it measures is always the dharmas of body and mind, and nothing else.
Three Points to Watch
-
The two ends of a single rule. The ultimate atom is the lower limit reached by analyzing downward until nothing can be analyzed further; the great aeon is the upper limit reached by accumulating upward to eighty intermediate aeons. Between them the sevenfold increase joins the crevice-roaming dust that the eye can see all the way down to the ultimate atom that it cannot, and the numbers one hundred twenty, sixty, and thirty join the moment all the way up to the year. The lower end is won by analysis and the upper end by accumulation, and both ends are hung upon what can be experienced — the lower upon the floating dust in a window’s crevice, the upper upon the increase and decrease of human life (“in every aeon the increase goes no higher than eighty thousand, and the decrease of every aeon reaches only ten years at the least”). This move is the general rule for reading an Abhidharma table of numbers: every set of numbers must have one end resting upon experience, or it is no more than numbers. And at the close of this fascicle the rule is itself withdrawn — the force of the three catastrophes leaves “not so much as an ultimate atom remaining,” so that the lower limit of what is measured is itself among the things destroyed.
-
Time is not a container. The whole fascicle lays time out at the greatest length and in the closest detail; and yet, once the four aeons have been reckoned, the author inserts only one question: “What is the nature of an aeon? It is the five aggregates alone.” An aeon is not a vessel that holds dharmas; it is only a stretch of the five aggregates continuing in time. This one question is the pivot of the whole fascicle — without it the eighty intermediate aeons become a cosmological frame; with it the entire timetable is an unfolding of the enumerated dharmas. The same gathering-in appears again at the end: the three catastrophes do not reach the fourth meditative absorption, and “for this the Buddha named it Immovable”; yet as soon as someone asks whether it is not then permanent, the treatise answers at once, “It is not so, because it arises together with sentient beings and ceases together with them.” Not even upon the topmost level is a single permanent exception left standing, and this line matters more than any number.
-
How far a catastrophe reaches is measured by one’s own agitation. Why do the three catastrophes have their summits only at the second, the third, and the fourth meditative absorption? The treatise’s answer lies not outside but within: the first absorption has applied and sustained thought for its inward catastrophe, and so meets fire without; the second has the feeling of joy for its inward catastrophe, moistening the body as water does, and so meets water without; the third has the movement of the breath for its inward catastrophe, and breath is precisely wind, and so meets wind without; the fourth has left all three behind, and so no outward catastrophe can reach it. This is the same principle as that stated in the section on the aeon of dissolution, that “a catastrophe of another level cannot destroy that other level” — a catastrophe destroys a level by drawing what is of its own kind, not by spreading. Brought down to practice it comes to a single sentence: the grade to which the outward world is secure answers exactly to the grade to which the inward mind is stilled; and as for the upward migration when catastrophe comes, for three of the continents and for the heavens meditative absorption is the gate — the northern continent alone excepted, where beings are born among the gods of desire when their lifespan is exhausted, and not by absorption; at the aeon of dissolution sentient beings for the most part migrate upward level by level by meditative absorption.
One Further Point (Appended): That One Mouthful of the Savor of the Earth
The people at the beginning of the aeon had bodies that gave off light and fed upon joy. One of them was by nature greedy for savor; he took a taste and ate it, and the rest followed his example — “only then was it named the first taking of morsel food.” From there the chain never breaks: the body grew hard and heavy and its light sank away, and only then were there sun and moon; greed for savor increased by degrees, and the savor of the earth, the earth-cake, the forest creeper, and the fragrant rice withdrew one grade at a time; the food was coarse and left refuse in the body, so that the two passages appeared, and with them the male and female faculties and improper attention; someone was by nature indolent and took more at once and stored it, and thence arose the thought “mine,” the dividing of the fields, grudging guardianship, and encroachment, and from these theft arose; to guard against thieves a man was hired to watch the fields and was invested as lord of the fields, and thence the names of king and of kṣatriya were established; others, wearying of household life and delighting in the open quiet, cultivated the observance of the precepts, and thence gained the name brahmin; a later king could not provide his land equally, inflicted punishments, and killing arose; and the guilty, hiding their faults, gave rise to false speech.
At the section on the three lesser catastrophes the treatise turns back and gathers this long chain into eight words — “these calamities have two dharmas for their root: first, greed for fine food; second, an indolent nature.” The ruin of a world does not come from outside; its first cause lies far back in that one mouthful of the savor of the earth and that one taking of more than was needed. The remedies are slight in the same measure: keeping the precept against killing for one day and one night, or offering the community a single medicinal fruit or a single ball of food with an earnest and pure mind — cause and result are alike in the mind, and so the place to lay hold is in the mind as well.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The “ultimate atom” is here established as the lower limit of form, and the later discussions of whether form is provisional or real, and of aggregation and assemblage, must all come back to the definition given in this fascicle; while the long passage at the end of this fascicle refuting the non-Buddhists’ permanent atom takes the single route of “taking what has not been granted as one’s proof,” and is one of the few stretches of defense of the doctrine in the whole treatise. The “three asaṃkhyeya aeons” are here explained as a fixed place in a series of numbers and not as a flourish — “the word innumerable does not display that it cannot be numbered” — and the treatise honestly records that “within this series of numbers the remaining eight have been lost.” The four questions and answers that follow place upon compassion the reason a bodhisattva is willing to spend that number — “a bodhisattva relieves beings and thereby fulfills his own compassion, and so relieving others is itself his own benefit” — the one passage in the Chapter on the World that measures mind rather than world. The name “Immovable” is established here, and when the chapter on absorption later states the differences among the four meditative absorptions and why the fourth is most fit to be relied upon, its root is in this place. And the law of symmetry between formation and dissolution, “by the nature of things what is destroyed last must be formed first,” is the base text of every later reckoning of aeons — the fascicle closes by taking the sixty-four aeons of the lifespan of the Śubhakṛtsna gods in the Treatise of Designations as a single verification, which is the score this whole system of reckoning hands in for itself.
業體·表無表The Nature of Action · Manifest and Nonmanifest
全文五層 →Full five layers →世品畫完了世間的樣子,業品接著問這幅圖是怎麼來的。這一卷從「如是差別由誰而生」一問起,先答『由業』,再把業拆成思與思所作、身語意三業、表與無表;然後一頭栽進兩場大諍——身表以什麼為體、無表究竟是不是實有。兩場諍占去全卷一半以上的篇幅——論主於正量部『動即身表』一說有明破明結(「既由斯理行動定無,身表是形理得成立」),而於有部與經部二造之勝負,終以「且止此等眾多諍論」收場,不下最後一句判語。
一句話:這一卷不是在證明某一宗對,是在示範兩個都看不見的東西該怎麼比——有部說有一個實在的無表色在相續,經部說只是思所熏的種子在相續;論主自己說「然此與彼俱難了知,今於此中無所憎嫉」,然後把兩造的理由一句不少地錄下來。
三個眼目
-
世間沒有作者,只有作業的人。開卷第一句就把造物者劃掉了——「非由一主先覺而生,但由有情業差別起」。接著論主用一組對照把這句話坐實:同一批雜業,感得的內身「於九瘡門常流不淨」,感得的外具卻「色香味觸甚可愛樂」;而「諸天眾等造純淨業,故彼所招二事俱妙」。內外之美醜不由誰分配,由業純不純決定。 這是全論所有數字與分類真正的地基。
-
同一組法,可以由不同的尺分別安立。三業何以立三?論主自己把三條路各走一遍都走不通,答案在毘婆沙師一句——「毘婆沙師說立三業,如其次第由上三因」:身業就所依立、語業就自性立、意業就等起立。三把尺,不是一把。 這一手全卷用了三次:三業之立、四善四不善之四因(勝義·自性·相應·等起)、有漏法既是勝義不善又可約異熟說善惡無記。凡遇數目對不上,第一問不是誰錯,是這幾項各用了哪一把尺。
-
辯的是『需不需要一個實體』,不是『有沒有這回事』。經部從來沒有否認戒能防非、福會增長、業道能成滿;它只否認這些功能需要一個叫『無表色』的實體來承載——「立形為身表,但假而非實」。有部八證的骨架也只有一句:經裡有一個位置空著,只有無表填得進去。所以破法也只有一種——再找出一個同樣填得進去的東西(定境色、思所熏的種子相續)。這把尺是本卷留給全論最好用的工具。
一義(附):滅為什麼不待因
全卷最硬的一段推理只有一句話:「謂有為法滅不待因。所以者何?待因謂果,滅無非果,故不待因」——要因的是果,滅是無、無不是果,所以滅不要因;不要因就沒有東西攔著它,所以纔生即滅。
對方搬出現量:柴薪遇火不是明明滅了嗎。論主反徵一句「如何知薪等,由火合故滅」,然後給出全段的樞紐分辨:看不見有兩種可能——火滅了它,或者它自己滅了而後面不再生起。論舉「如風手合燈焰鈴聲」為例:風吹燈、手按鈴,沒有人會說風與手『滅』了燈焰鈴聲。所以「故此義成應由比量」。
再逼一手:若火合是滅因,那麼熟變有下中上三品,同一個火合一邊生一邊滅,「應生因體即成滅因」。對方最後問煎水減盡時火做了什麼,論主答:火只使「水聚於後後位生漸漸微」——火起的是生的作用,不是滅的作用。於是收束:「故無有因令諸法滅,法自然滅,是壞性故」,「有剎那故定無行動」,「身表是形理得成立」。
這一段的價值不在結論,在它教會讀者分清『我看見的』與『我對所見的解釋』。
通於全論
業之開合(思/思已、身語意、表無表)是往後六卷的坐標系:律儀不律儀之得捨、十業道之成滿、五無間之判定,全部掛在本卷所立的體上。「等起有二種」一頌所立的轉與隨轉,是判業性善惡的鑰匙——下一卷講三律儀之隨心轉、講表無表之成就,用的都是它。
兩個線頭留給後文。其一,經部把業收在思上、把無表化成思的種子相續;這條線出了本論之後被完整承接,成為另一系的自宗——本卷之中的『並錄一造』,在那裡是『正說』。其二,論主在本卷留了兩處明白的空格:異類心所起的得等如何成善,「此義應思」;定中隨心轉的無表如何成善,「於如是義應設劬勞」。古德在難處標存疑,這也是體例。
最後一件事值得記住。本卷末段那句收結——經是「唯據餘心所間因等起說」——示範了阿毘達磨最典型的動作:不取消爭點,只給爭點加一個限定詞。加了四個字,兩難同時消解。往下六卷,這一手還要用很多次。
The Chapter on the World finished drawing what the world looks like; the Chapter on Action goes on to ask where that picture came from. This fascicle begins from the one question “by what are differences such as these produced?”, answers first “by action,” and then takes action apart into volition and what volition does, into the three actions of body, speech, and mind, and into the manifest and the nonmanifest; whereupon it plunges headlong into two great disputes — what the entity of bodily manifest action is, and whether nonmanifest action really exists at all. The two disputes take up more than half of the whole fascicle — on the Sāṃmitīya account that “motion is bodily manifest action” the author refutes and concludes expressly (“since by this principle motion is definitely nonexistent, that bodily manifest action is shape is established in principle”), while on the contest between the Sarvāstivāda and Sautrāntika parties he closes with “let these many disputes rest here for now,” and passes no final sentence.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not proving one school right; it is demonstrating how two things that are equally invisible ought to be compared — the Sarvāstivādins say a really existing nonmanifest form continues on, the Sautrāntikas say only a seed perfumed by volition continues on; and the author himself says “this and that are alike hard to know, and here I bear no grudge against either,” and then records the reasons of both parties without omitting a sentence.
Three Points to Watch
-
The world has no maker, only beings who do actions. The very first sentence of the fascicle strikes out the creator — “they do not arise from a single lord who first conceived them, but arise from the differences in the actions of sentient beings.” The author then makes the sentence good with a pair of contrasts: from one and the same mixed actions, the inner body obtained “constantly runs impurity from the nine sores,” while the outer goods obtained are “in color, scent, taste, and touch most lovely and delightful”; and “the hosts of gods do wholly pure actions, and so the two things they draw to themselves are both excellent.” The beauty and ugliness of inner and outer are not apportioned by anyone; they are settled by whether the action is pure or mixed. This is the real ground floor beneath every number and every classification in the whole treatise.
-
One and the same set of dharmas may be established separately by different measures. Why are the three actions established as three? The author walks each of the three roads himself and finds none of them passable; the answer lies in one sentence of the Vaibhāṣikas — “the Vaibhāṣika masters say that the three actions are established, in that same order, by the three causes above”: bodily action is established from its support, verbal action from its own nature, mental action from what raises it. Three measures, not one. The fascicle uses the move three times: in establishing the three actions, in the four causes of the four kinds of wholesome and the four kinds of unwholesome (ultimate · intrinsic · associated · raised), and in the fact that the dharmas with outflows are unwholesome in the ultimate sense and yet may be called wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate as reckoned by maturation. Whenever the numbers do not agree, the first question is not who is wrong but which measure each of these items was taken with.
-
What is argued is “whether an entity is needed,” not “whether the thing happens.” The Sautrāntikas never denied that discipline holds off wrongdoing, that merit grows, that a path of action can be completed; they deny only that these functions need an entity called “nonmanifest form” to carry them — “shape is established as bodily manifest action, but as a convention and not as a real thing.” The skeleton of the Sarvāstivādins’ eight proofs is likewise a single sentence: there is a slot standing empty in the sūtras, and only the nonmanifest will fit it. So there is only one way to refute them too — find one more thing that fits the slot just as well (form in the object-field of absorption; the continuum of seeds perfumed by volition). This measure is the most serviceable tool the fascicle leaves to the treatise as a whole.
One Further Point (Appended): Why Cessation Awaits No Cause
The hardest stretch of reasoning in the whole fascicle is a single sentence: “that is, the cessation of conditioned dharmas awaits no cause. Why so? What awaits a cause is a result; cessation is a nonexistence, and a nonexistence is not a result, and so it awaits no cause” — what needs a cause is a result, cessation is a nonexistence and a nonexistence is not a result, so cessation needs no cause; and needing no cause, there is nothing holding it back, and so it ceases as soon as it arises.
The opponent brings up direct perception: when firewood meets fire, is it not plainly extinguished? The author questions back with one line, “how do you know that firewood and the rest cease because of their conjunction with fire?”, and then gives the pivot-distinction of the whole passage: not seeing a thing admits of two explanations — either the fire extinguished it, or it ceased of itself and what follows no longer arises. The treatise offers as instance “the conjunction of wind with a lamp flame and of a hand with a bell’s sound”: wind blows on the lamp, a hand stops the bell, and nobody would say that the wind and the hand “extinguished” the flame and the sound. Hence “therefore this sense must be made out by inference.”
He presses once more: if conjunction with fire were the cause of cessation, then in cooking-change there are the three grades of low, middle, and high, and one and the same conjunction with fire would be producing on one side and extinguishing on the other, so that “the entity of a productive cause would become an extinguishing cause.” The opponent asks at last what the fire does when boiling water dwindles away, and the author answers that fire only makes “the mass of water arise ever more slightly in each successive stage” — what fire performs is the work of producing, not the work of extinguishing. And so the passage closes: “therefore there is no cause that makes dharmas cease; dharmas cease of themselves, since it is their nature to perish,” “since they have moments, motion is definitely nonexistent,” “that bodily manifest action is shape is established in principle.”
The value of this passage lies not in its conclusion but in its teaching the reader to tell “what I saw” apart from “my interpretation of what I saw.”
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The opening out of action (volition / having-willed; body, speech, mind; manifest and nonmanifest) is the coordinate system for the six fascicles that follow: obtaining and relinquishing discipline and non-discipline, the completion of the ten paths of action, the adjudication of the five deeds of immediate retribution — all of it hangs on the entities established in this fascicle. The raising and the concurrent raising established in the stanza “what raises them is of two kinds” are the key by which the wholesome or unwholesome nature of an action is judged — and the next fascicle uses that key throughout, in treating how the three disciplines turn along with the mind and how the manifest and nonmanifest are achieved.
Two loose threads are left for what follows. First, the Sautrāntikas gather action up into volition and turn the nonmanifest into a continuum of the seeds of volition; once out of this treatise, that thread is taken up whole and becomes the home position of another lineage — what is here “one of two parties recorded” is there the correct account. Second, the author leaves two express blanks in this fascicle: how obtainment and the rest raised by a mind of a different class become wholesome, “this sense should be pondered”; and how the nonmanifest that turns along with the mind in absorption becomes wholesome, “on a sense such as this one should expend some labor.” That the ancient masters mark their doubts at the hard places is itself part of the form.
One last thing is worth remembering. The closing sentence of the fascicle — that the sūtra “speaks only with regard to the causal raising that is interrupted by other minds” — demonstrates the most typical move in all of Abhidharma: not to cancel the point at issue, but only to add a qualifier to it. Four words are added, and both horns of the dilemma dissolve at once. In the six fascicles that follow, the move will be used many times more.
三律儀·近事近住·三歸The Three Disciplines · The Lay Follower and the One-Day Observance · The Three Refuges
全文五層 →Full five layers →業品前卷辯業之體,此卷辯業之戒。從『無表有三種』起,一路立三律儀、開別解脫八名而收體為四、安立近事近住勤策苾芻、訓釋尸羅妙行諸名、排成就的過現未、定得戒之緣與受戒之期、詳近住八支與三歸之體,末以邪行最可訶與遮中唯離酒二問收束——一部毘曇的戒學篇,整卷在這裡。
一句話:這一卷不是在講該不該持戒,是在替『戒』找一個存放的地方;找到的地方叫無表——不顯現於外、不隨心而轉、自己會相續,於是持戒才不必靠當下那一念撐著。
三個眼目
-
戒被安在『無表』這一格,所以它睡著了也還在。律儀之得名只有一句話——能遮能滅惡戒相續。遮是擋住將來的,滅是斷掉已來的;兩件事都不是當下那一念在做,是那一分不隨心的體在做。所以別解脫律儀不隨心轉,論給的理由是異心無心亦恒轉。受戒的意義因此不在誓言本身,在誓言那一剎那所發起的那個東西。 全卷成就位次的長段——住律儀的、住不律儀的、住中的、得定的、聖者的,各成過現未哪一分——量的都是這一個體,不是量你的決心。
-
名的數目與體的數目要分開算。八種別解脫只有四個體,理由是離男眾那一個並沒有另一個女眾的;證據是轉根——形改而體無捨得,只是名有異。同一把尺又用在別處:尸羅、妙行、業、律儀、別解脫、業道六名是同一分善戒,惡行、惡戒、業、業道、不律儀五名是同一分惡戒;而『業道』兩邊都只指最初一念,其餘各名都通初後。遇到數目對不上,第一問不是誰對,是這兩個數在數名還是在數體。 判體之同異的尺只有一條:有沒有捨得,不是條文多少。
-
期限只有兩個自然邊際,品第只有一個決定者。戒的時間邊際但有二種——壽命邊際與晝夜邊際;半月等等只是把晝夜重說,沒有第三個邊際可用,所以不會有『受三年五戒』這回事。而戒的下中上品,判準只有一個字:隨受心。由這個道理會出現一個刺眼的結果——阿羅漢或有成就下品律儀,異生或成上品。時間由外在的自然界劃,品質由受戒那一念心定;兩者都不由你後來的果位追認。
一義(附):一分等四句之諍
經說有能學一分、少分、多分、滿分四種近事;有部說近事必具五戒。二者相違,這是本卷最大的一場諍。
有部的通法只有一句:約能持說——五條全受了,只是持得住幾條有別;若不然,經上該說『受一分』而不是『學一分』。經部逐句追下去:沒有一部經說自稱便發五戒;那句捨生歸淨是見諦者舉命自要,不是為說近事相而說;若就持犯說一分等,受戒的人根本不必問佛。有部反過來例破:若闕律儀能名近事,苾芻勤策闕亦應成。經部反責支量何以定爾,有部答由佛教力施設,經部就照樣回一句——那也該許由佛教力施設,雖闕律儀而名近事。
七番往復之後,論主不作裁決,只寫一句本宗的結語:迦濕彌羅國毘婆沙師,不許闕律儀得成近事。這是本論體例的一次示範——一義二宗並錄,句面自標是誰的宗,不替讀者判勝負。 本卷第二處這樣的並錄,是飲酒屬性罪還是遮罪;兩造所爭的只是憑什麼不飲,在『不飲』這件事上並無二說。
通於全論
無表之立是這一卷的地基,也是往後律儀得捨、十業道成不成、業障輕重諸章的坐標系。三歸在這裡被立為一切受律儀處的方便門——不受三歸則無近住,這一句把三歸從入門的儀節提成門本身。性罪與遮罪的分界也在這裡劃定:遮罪之中唯獨酒被制進戒支,理由不在酒本身重,而在它會讓人守不住其餘的律儀;同一個理由使虛誑語成為一切律儀共制的一條——一開了說謊之門,發露就沒了,其餘各條也跟著鬆。
還有兩件事是這一卷留給讀者的線頭。其一,三歸之體所歸的是能成佛與能成僧的法、以及擇滅;論在同段自己把『唯無學法即是佛』這個誤讀堵死了——它明說本論不曾言唯,只說能成。讀三歸最容易走偏的地方就在這個『唯』字上。其二,本卷把戒判為實有的色法,而唯識一系於同一個名相逕作假立之判;同一個『無表』,兩代兩答,這是本卷最值得對讀的一處。
The previous fascicle of the Chapter on Action made out the entity of action; this fascicle makes out the discipline of action. Beginning from “the nonmanifest is of three kinds,” it establishes the three disciplines, opens the eight names of individual liberation and gathers their entities back into four, sets up the lay follower, the one-day observance, the novice, and the bhikṣu, glosses the names śīla, excellent conduct, and the rest, ranges the past, present, and future of what is possessed, settles the conditions by which discipline is obtained and the term for which it is undertaken, sets out in detail the eight limbs of the one-day observance and the entity of the three refuges, and closes with the two questions of why sexual misconduct is the most reproachable and why among the prohibited offences liquor alone is abstained from — the section on the discipline of an Abhidharma treatise is all of it here.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not arguing whether one ought to keep the discipline; it is finding a place where “discipline” can be kept — and the place it finds is called the nonmanifest: not displayed outwardly, not turning along with the mind, continuing on of itself, so that keeping the discipline need not be propped up by the thought of the present moment.
Three Points to Watch
-
Discipline is lodged in the square called “the nonmanifest,” and so it is still there while you sleep. The naming of discipline is a single sentence — it can block and can extinguish the continuum of evil discipline. Blocking holds off what is to come, extinguishing cuts off what has already come; and neither of those two things is done by the thought of the present moment, but by that portion of the entity which does not follow the mind. Hence the discipline of individual liberation does not turn along with the mind, and the reason the treatise gives is that it turns constantly even when the mind is other or when there is no mind at all. The point of undertaking the discipline lies therefore not in the vow itself but in the thing that the vow raises in that one instant. The long stretch of the fascicle on the stages of possession — one who abides in discipline, one who abides in non-discipline, one who abides in the middle, one who has obtained absorption, the noble one, and which portion of past, present, and future each of them possesses — is measuring that one entity throughout, and not measuring your resolve.
-
The number of the names and the number of the entities must be reckoned separately. The eight kinds of individual liberation have only four entities, the reason being that apart from the one for the men there is no further one for the women; and the proof is the turning of the faculty — the shape changes while the entity is neither relinquished nor obtained, and only the name differs. The same measure is used elsewhere: śīla, excellent conduct, action, discipline, individual liberation, and path of action are six names for one and the same portion of wholesome discipline; evil conduct, evil discipline, action, path of action, and non-discipline are five names for one and the same portion of evil discipline; and on both sides “path of action” refers to the first thought-instant alone, while the remaining names extend to the first and to what follows. Whenever the numbers do not agree, the first question is not who is wrong but whether the two numbers are counting names or counting entities. The measure for judging sameness and difference of entity is one only: whether there is relinquishing and obtaining — not how many articles there are.
-
The term has only two natural bounds, and the grade has only one thing that settles it. The bounds of time for discipline are two only — the bound of the life span and the bound of a day and a night; a half-month and the rest are only the day and night said over again, and there is no third bound to be had, and so there is no such thing as “undertaking the five precepts for three years.” And for the low, middle, and high grades of discipline the criterion is a single word: the mind with which it is undertaken. From this principle a startling result follows — an arhat may possess a discipline of the low grade, while an ordinary being may possess one of the high. Time is bounded by the natural world outside; quality is settled by the thought at the moment of undertaking; and neither of them is conferred retroactively by the fruit you later attain.
One Further Point (Appended): The Dispute over the Four Statements of “One Part” and the Rest
The sūtra says there are four lay followers, able to train in one part, in a small part, in a large part, and in the full part; the Sarvāstivādins say a lay follower must be complete in the five precepts. The two are in conflict, and this is the largest dispute in the fascicle.
The Sarvāstivādins’ way of construing the sūtra is a single sentence: it is said with regard to what can be kept — all five articles have been undertaken, and the difference lies only in how many can be held; were it otherwise, the sūtra ought to have said “undertakes one part” and not “trains in one part.” The Sautrāntikas press the point sentence by sentence: no sūtra says that the self-declaration itself raises the five precepts; that line about renouncing life and turning to the pure is one who has seen the truths staking his life upon his own oath, and is not said in order to set out the marks of a lay follower; and if “one part” and the rest were said with regard to keeping and transgressing, the man undertaking the discipline would have had no need to ask the Buddha at all. The Sarvāstivādins refute by parallel instance in return: if one may be called a lay follower while lacking the discipline, then a bhikṣu and a novice who lack it ought to be established as such too. The Sautrāntikas retort by asking why the measure of limbs is fixed as it is; the Sarvāstivādins answer that it is instituted by the force of the Buddha’s teaching; and the Sautrāntikas answer back in the same coin — then it should equally be allowed that by the force of the Buddha’s teaching one may be called a lay follower though lacking the discipline.
After seven exchanges the author hands down no verdict, and writes only one sentence closing back upon his own school: the Vaibhāṣika masters of Kaśmīra do not allow that one who lacks the discipline can become a lay follower. This is one demonstration of the form of the treatise — one meaning and two schools recorded together, the sentence marking on its face whose school it is, and not judging the winner for the reader. The second such recording in this fascicle is whether the drinking of liquor is an intrinsic offence or a prohibited one; what the two parties dispute is only on what ground one is not to drink, and on the matter of not drinking there is no second account.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The establishing of the nonmanifest is the ground floor of this fascicle and also the coordinate system for the later chapters on the obtaining and relinquishing of discipline, on whether the ten paths of action are completed, and on the weight of the obstruction of action. The three refuges are established here as the gateway of means at every place where a discipline is undertaken — without undertaking the three refuges there is no one-day observance, and that one sentence lifts the three refuges from an entrance ceremony into the gate itself. The line between intrinsic offences and prohibited ones is drawn here as well: among the prohibited offences liquor alone is written into the limbs of the discipline, and the reason lies not in the gravity of liquor itself but in its making a man unable to hold the remaining disciplines; and the same reason makes false speech the one article instituted in common in every discipline — once the door of lying is open, disclosure is gone, and the other articles slacken along with it.
Two loose threads are left for the reader. First, what the entity of the three refuges takes refuge in is the dharmas that can make a Buddha and can make a Saṅgha, together with cessation through discernment; and in the same passage the treatise itself blocks the misreading “the dharmas beyond learning alone are the Buddha” — it says expressly that this treatise never said “alone,” but only “can make.” The place where a reading of the three refuges most easily goes astray is just that word “alone.” Second, this fascicle adjudges discipline to be really existent form, while the Yogācāra lineage, upon the very same term, adjudges it straightway to be conventionally established; one and the same “nonmanifest,” two ages and two answers — this is the most rewarding place in the fascicle for parallel reading.
律儀得捨·業之諸門Obtaining and Relinquishing Discipline · Action through the Several Gates
全文五層 →Full five layers →上一卷把三種律儀立起來,這一卷問它從哪裡得、得多少、由什麼緣走。捨義說盡之後,論筆一轉,「因辯諸業性相不同,當釋經中所摽諸業」——從善惡無記起,一路排到曲穢濁,把經裡出現過的業名逐一給出可檢驗的體性。一卷之內,前半是戒的機械學,後半是業的分類學。
一句話:這一卷不是在講戒條,是在講戒體是被什麼撐住的;撐住它的東西一樣一樣壞掉,戒就一樣一樣地捨——所以論在列完五緣之後立刻補一句「與受相違表業生故、所依捨故、所依變故、所因斷故、過期限故」,把五條規定還原成五種壞法。
三個眼目
-
戒的範圍是心的範圍,不是行為的範圍。論在最前面就斷死了一句——「無有不遍於諸有情得律儀者,以於一切諸有情所住善意樂方得律儀,異則不然,以惡意樂不全息故」。所以受戒之前若心裡留著五種定限(有情、支、處、時、緣)之任何一種,所得的便不是律儀,而是「律儀相似妙行」。論不說那是假的,只說那不是律儀。 這把尺後來又用了一次:卵生龍求受八關齋,論同樣判作「此得妙行,非得律儀」——同一種安立,兩處示範。
-
要捨一個體,須以另一個體去奪。惡戒不由『不再做』而自壞——「住惡戒者,雖或有時起不作思捨刀網等,若不受得諸善律儀,諸不律儀無容棄捨」,並立喻「譬如雖避發病因緣,不服良藥病終難愈」。奪它的是善戒,理由是「以善惡戒其性相違,善戒於中勢力強故」。避緣只是不再加重,受戒才是解除。 而煩惱之體則另有其奪者——「三界一切非色染法捨由一緣,謂彼但由對治道起」,且明說「非餘方便」。二處對讀,本論的立場極清楚:能奪惡戒者是善戒,能奪煩惱者唯有對治道。
-
業之定與不定,繫於心與境的極端,不繫於事的大小。論列定業之處只有五個——重煩惱、淳淨心、恒所作、功德田、父母;前三是心的極端,後二是境的極端(一約德、一約恩)。所以田勝者一句僧中之語現世轉身,意勝者一次救牛之事現世轉身,論皆自舉為例。這條路是雙向的:論說於五種功德田「若有於中為損益業,此業必定能招即果」——損與益並列,在最勝之田前,惡業之果也最速。
一義(附):本卷唯一的一次明判,與兩次不判
本卷體例仍是遇異說而經無明文者二造並錄——缺支之不律儀(毘婆沙師「必無缺支及餘一分可得名住不律儀人」/經部「隨所期限支具不具及全分一分皆得不律儀」)、犯重是否捨戒(三說並書於頌)、夜盡捨近住之後(二師並陳),論皆不判。連至親與羊那一組最密的往復,論也只錄到經部反責的一句「於等事中應求異理」為止,二宗理未安處照錄而不強為判定。
唯有一處論主下了判語:下地有沒有第三種順非二業。長行連錄三說,論主逕以「二說俱與本論相違」收之,並引本論二問為證。分界就在有沒有明文可依——有本論明文,故判;無明文,故不判。這一條是讀本卷(乃至讀全論)最省力的一把鑰匙。
通於全論
本卷所辨的,是「無表」這一法在得與捨兩面的全幅;它的實有性在此是前提,而這個前提到了唯識一系被正面取消——同一個名字,一系立為實有之色而細論其得捨之緣,一系判為依思願分限的假立。二系分途,此處最見鋒面。
本卷後半的十一目業門,是往後黑白四業、十業道、三重障諸章的總表;而定不定業四句與中有二十二業連讀,正是業果教學之核。三時業之判準在此定為『時之定不定』與『異熟之定不定』二重,瑜伽行系於同名之業則改以『作與增長』為判——同一批名字,兩套判準,可以並看。
還有兩件事是這一卷留給讀者的線頭。其一,論在退果一段末補了「諸退果已必不命終,如後當辯」,把退與命終的關係留到後文;其二,正60 一頌在此只講了前半(曲穢濁),後半的黑白四業另起一卷——本卷收在「若依貪生身語意業名為濁業,貪濁類故」這一句上,剛好是經中諸業之名釋到第六目為止。
The last fascicle set up the three disciplines; this one asks where they are obtained from, how much of them is obtained, and by what conditions they go away. When the sense of relinquishing has been said out to the end, the brush of the treatise turns: “since the natures and marks of the several actions have been made out to differ, the actions set forth in the sūtras should now be explained” — from wholesome, unwholesome, and indeterminate it works its way straight down to the crooked, the foul, and the turbid, giving one by one, for every name of action that has occurred in the sūtras, an entity that can be checked. Within a single fascicle, the first half is the mechanics of the discipline and the second half the taxonomy of action.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not expounding the rules of the discipline; it is expounding what it is that holds the entity of the discipline up — the things that hold it up break down one by one, and the discipline is relinquished one by one; and so, immediately after listing the five conditions, the treatise adds the sentence “because a manifest action arises that contradicts what was undertaken, because the support is relinquished, because the support is altered, because what it rests upon is cut off, because the term of time is passed,” restoring the five stipulations to five ways of breaking down.
Three Points to Watch
-
The range of the discipline is the range of the mind, not the range of behavior. At the very front the treatise settles the matter dead: “there is no one who obtains discipline without its extending to all sentient beings, since it is only by abiding in a wholesome disposition toward all sentient beings that discipline is obtained; otherwise not, since the unwholesome disposition has not wholly ceased.” Hence, if before taking up the discipline any one of the five stipulations (of sentient beings, of limbs, of places, of times, of circumstances) is still kept in the mind, what is obtained is not discipline but “an excellent conduct resembling discipline.” The treatise does not say that this is spurious; it says only that it is not discipline. The same measure is applied once more later: when egg-born nāgas come to ask for the eight-limbed one-day observance, the treatise likewise adjudges that “this obtains excellent conduct, it does not obtain discipline” — one and the same establishing, demonstrated in two places.
-
To relinquish one entity, another entity must dispossess it. Evil discipline does not break down of itself by “not doing it any more” — “one who abides in evil discipline, though he may at times give rise to the volition of not doing and lay aside knife and net, yet if he does not take on the wholesome disciplines, there is no way for the non-disciplines to be cast off,” and the simile is set up: “as when, though one avoids the causes and conditions of falling ill, yet without taking good medicine the illness is in the end hard to cure.” What dispossesses it is the wholesome discipline, and the reason is that “since the natures of the wholesome and the evil discipline contradict each other, the wholesome discipline is the stronger in force among them.” To avoid the circumstances is only to stop adding weight; to take on the discipline is to be released. For the entity of an affliction, on the other hand, there is another dispossessor — “all the defiled dharmas that are not form, in all three realms, are relinquished by one condition alone, namely that their counteracting path arises,” and it is said expressly “by no other means.” Read the two places together and the position of this treatise is perfectly clear: what can dispossess evil discipline is wholesome discipline, and what can dispossess an affliction is the counteracting path alone.
-
Whether an action is settled or unsettled hangs upon the extremes of mind and of field, not upon the size of the deed. The places where the treatise lists settled action are just five — a weighty affliction, a purely pure mind, what is constantly done, a field of merit, and one’s father and mother; the first three are extremes of mind, the last two extremes of field (the one by way of virtue, the other by way of kindness). And so a man who says a single sentence within the assembly is turned about bodily within this very life by the excellence of the field, and a man who once saves oxen is turned about bodily within this very life by the excellence of his intent; the treatise itself adduces both as instances. This road runs both ways: the treatise says of the five fields of merit that “if there be an action of harm or of benefit toward them, this action must necessarily draw its result at once” — harm and benefit stand side by side, and before the most excellent of fields the result of an unwholesome action is likewise the swiftest.
One Further Point (Appended): The One Express Adjudication of This Fascicle, and the Two Refusals to Adjudicate
The form of this fascicle is still that where divergent accounts are met and the sūtras have no express text, both parties are recorded — the non-discipline with a limb wanting (the Vibhāṣā masters: “there can be no man with a limb wanting or with only a part remaining who may be called one abiding in non-discipline” / the Sautrāntikas: “according to the term he has set, whether the limbs be complete or incomplete, whether the whole or a part, in every case non-discipline is obtained”), and whether a grave transgression relinquishes the discipline (three accounts written together in the stanza); in neither does the treatise adjudicate. Even in that most tightly packed exchange of all, over the near kinsman and the sheep, the treatise records only as far as the Sautrāntikas’ counter-reproach, “in matters equal such as these another principle should be sought,” recording as they stand the places where the two schools’ reasoning is not settled and not forcing an adjudication.
In one place only does the author hand down a verdict: whether the lower levels have a third kind of action conducive to neither. The prose commentary records three accounts in a row, and the author gathers them up directly with “both accounts contradict the root treatise,” adducing two questions from the root treatise as his proof. The dividing line lies exactly in whether there is an express text to rely upon — where there is an express text of the root treatise, he adjudicates; where there is none, he does not. This one point is the most labor-saving key there is for reading this fascicle, and indeed for reading the whole treatise.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
What this fascicle makes out is the full compass of that one dharma, the “nonmanifest,” on its two sides of obtaining and relinquishing; its real existence is here a premise, and that premise is expressly cancelled once one comes to the Yogācāra lineage — one and the same name, which the one lineage establishes as a really existent form and discusses in fine detail as to the conditions of its obtaining and relinquishing, while the other adjudges it a conventional establishment upon the delimitations of volition and aspiration. The two lineages part ways, and here the edge shows most.
The eleven gates of action in the second half of this fascicle are the master table for the chapters to come on the four actions black and white, on the ten paths of action, and on the three obstructions; while the four alternatives of settled and unsettled action read together with the twenty-two actions of intermediate existence are the very heart of the teaching on action and result. The criteria for the actions of the three times are here fixed as the two layers of ‘settledness or unsettledness of time’ and ‘settledness or unsettledness of maturation’; the Yogācāra lineage, for actions of the same names, changes the criterion to ‘doing and increasing’ — one and the same set of names, two sets of criteria, and they may be looked at side by side.
Two more loose threads are left by this fascicle for the reader. First, at the end of the passage on falling back from a fruit the treatise adds “those who have fallen back from a fruit certainly do not then meet their end, as will be made out later,” leaving the relation of falling back to the end of life for the text that follows; second, of the one stanza Root 60 only the first half (the crooked, the foul, the turbid) is treated here, while the four actions black and white in its second half begin another fascicle — this fascicle closes upon the sentence “if the bodily, verbal, and mental actions arise in dependence upon greed they are called turbid action, since they are of the class of the turbidity of greed,” which is exactly where the explanation of the names of the actions in the sūtras has reached the sixth item and no further.
黑白四業·十業道The Four Actions, Black and White · The Ten Paths of Action
全文五層 →Full five layers →前三子講業之體、講表無表、講三種律儀從何處得。此子一句「又經中說,業有四種」轉身,逐條解釋經中所說的諸業:黑白四業、能盡諸業的那幾念無漏思、三牟尼三清淨、三惡行三妙行;而後從「又經中言:有十業道」起,開出全論講戒行最細的一段——業道之攝、表無表之分、加行根本後起三位、三根之起與究竟、所依之四處,以至殺盜婬妄離間麁惡雜穢與貪瞋邪見逐一辨其成與不成。
一句話:這一卷把『做了一件惡事』拆成一條有起點、有結點、有餘勢的線,然後逐條問:到哪一點才算真正成了業道。
位置(先立)
本子之界是本品第四道卷界,三家古德在此各自分卷而界線全同——光記與頌疏皆標為第七明黑黑等,寶疏標為第八明經中黑黑等四業,而所開的三個子目(四業名體、無漏斷別、敘異說)三分之義三家全合,只是科名的字面互異。卷中「又經中言:有十業道」一句是第二道更重的科界,三家同標為十業道章之始,所開六個子目也逐一相同。二端各有半頌跨界:起處的正六十只用後半,收處的正七十九只用前半——玄奘分卷取的是義界,不是頌界。真諦舊譯此段全落在他的一卷之內,其分卷與玄奘不同,跨本比對只能取場景結構。
三個眼目
-
業道之成,繫於一個確定的剎那。 屠羊者從發心、趣市、酬價、牽還、執刀,直到羊命未終,這一整段都只是加行;隨此表業而羊正命終的那一剎那之表無表業,才是根本業道;此後的無表相續,以至剝截烹賣讚美,都是後起。論並且點明成立根本的兩個緣——一由加行、二由果滿。所以本卷處處在問的其實是同一件事:現在講的這一條,是在講三段中的哪一段。俱死與前死之所以不成根本,正因為所依之身已滅而罪無所繫;軍陣同事之所以人人皆成,正因為那一念「同許為一事」的心已經把每個人都接到了同一條線上。
-
加行之根與究竟之根,是兩把不同的尺。 加行由三不善根一一而起——同一件殺業可以從貪起(為得財)、從瞋起(為除怨)、從癡起(以為是法、是律、是孝、是福);而究竟則各有所繫:殺、麁語、瞋恚由瞋究竟,要無所顧的極麁惡心現前;盜、邪行、貪由貪究竟,要有所顧的極染污心現前;邪見由癡究竟,餘三語則許由三根。回頭看一件已經做成的惡事,起心的理由常常好看,成事那一刻的心藏不住——這一條分辨最實用。而論所舉的「從癡起」諸例尤其該慢讀:那不是糊塗,是一套有祭祀、有法律、有經典替它撐腰的錯理路。
-
十業道是一張粗顯的網,網眼有多大要先知道。 論明說它只從惡行妙行中取「麁顯易知」的一分:飲酒、打縛、愛語、善思都不在其中,一切加行後起也不在其中。不入業道不等於無罪——它們仍是善不善業,仍然感果,只是不在這張為「令遠離」而立的清單上。同理,「不誤」一條貫穿殺、盜、婬、妄四門:誤殺、誤取、誤行、誤言都不成業道,而那並不是替它們開的後門,是這張清單自身的成立條件。
一義(附):留白的那一難
虛誑語之後,論自引一組問答:不動身而被殺罪所觸者是發語,不發語而被誑罪所觸者是動身,既不動身又不發語而被二罪所觸者,是仙人意憤與布灑他時。而後論主自設一難:若既不動身也不發語,而欲界又沒有離表而生的無表,這二者如何成業道?論主於此不答,只說「於如是難應設劬勞」。全卷細密如此,卻在收尾前留了一個明白的空缺——這不是疏漏,是論主自己劃出的未收束之處。眾賢於同一難處另立一解,以加行位必有表業相續為說;並錄不判。
通於全卷
這一卷讀起來像戒律的細則,數目與條件密得驚人;但真正承重的不是條目,是那個反覆出現的問法——心在哪一位、對著什麼境、由什麼根成。三位定其線,四處定其境,三根定其成;三者交出來的那一點,才是罪之所繫。
也正因如此,全卷最重的一條戒反而最短。前面九條業道走的是起心、動手、成事、餘勢那條長路,到了貪、瞋、邪見三種意業道,才現前即是根本,沒有加行後起可分。一念之現前與一場屠殺之完成,在這張表上是同一個位次——這是本卷讀到最後才顯出來的那一句話。
The first three units expounded the entity of action, expounded the manifest and the nonmanifest, and expounded from what the three disciplines are obtained. This unit turns upon a single sentence, “again the sūtra says that action is of four kinds,” and explains item by item the several actions spoken of in the sūtras: the four actions black and white, those few thought-moments of volition without outflows that can exhaust the actions, the three munis and the three purities, the three kinds of evil conduct and the three kinds of good conduct; and then, from “again the sūtra says: there are ten paths of action,” it opens the most finely worked stretch on conduct in the whole treatise — what the paths of action gather in, the division of the manifest and the nonmanifest, the three stages of the preparatory, the root, and the consequent, the arising from the three roots and the completion by them, the four places upon which they depend, and so on down to killing, stealing, sexual misconduct, false speech, divisive, harsh, and frivolous speech, and greed, hatred, and wrong view, each of them made out as to what does and does not constitute it.
In one sentence: This fascicle takes “an evil deed was done” apart into a line that has a starting point, a joining point, and a residual momentum, and then asks item by item: at which point does it truly become a path of action?
Placement (established first)
The boundary of this unit is the fourth fascicle-boundary of this chapter, and the three ancient masters, dividing their fascicles independently, set the line at exactly the same place — Puguang’s Record and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary both mark it as the seventh, explaining the black-and-black and the rest, while Fabao’s Commentary marks it as the eighth, explaining the four actions black and black and the rest spoken of in the sūtras; and the three subsections they open (the names and entities of the four actions, the distinctions in what the actions without outflows cut off, and the recording of divergent accounts) agree among all three in the sense of the threefold division, differing only in the wording of the outline names. Within the fascicle, the sentence “again the sūtra says: there are ten paths of action” is a second and weightier outline boundary, which all three mark alike as the beginning of the chapter on the ten paths of action, and the six subsections they open there are likewise one and the same. At each of the two ends a half stanza straddles the boundary: at the opening only the second half of Root 60 is used, and at the close only the first half of Root 79 — Xuanzang’s fascicle division takes the boundary of the sense, not the boundary of the stanzas. In Paramārtha’s earlier translation this whole passage falls within a single fascicle of his, his fascicle division being unlike Xuanzang’s, so that comparison across the two translations can only be made by the structure of the scene.
Three Points to Watch
-
A path of action is completed only at one determinate moment. From the moment the butcher of sheep first raises the thought, goes to the market, pays the price, leads the beast home, and takes up the knife, down to the point where the sheep’s life is not yet ended, the whole of that stretch is preparatory only; the manifest and nonmanifest action of the single moment in which, following upon that manifest act, the sheep just then ends its life — that alone is the root path of action; and thereafter the continuing of the nonmanifest, on through the flaying, the cutting, the selling, and the praising of the flavor, is all the consequent stage. The treatise further points out the two conditions by which the root is completed — first by the preparation, second by the fullness of the result. So what this fascicle is asking everywhere is really one and the same thing: of the three stages, which one is the present item speaking of? That dying together with the victim, or dying before him, does not complete the root is precisely because the body depended upon has perished and the offense has nothing to rest on; that in an army acting as one all alike are completed is precisely because that one thought of “consenting together to one undertaking” has already joined every man of them to the same line.
-
The root of the preparation and the root of the completion are two different measures. The preparation arises from the three unwholesome roots one by one — one and the same act of killing may arise from greed (to get wealth), from hatred (to be rid of an enemy), or from delusion (taking it for what is lawful, what is legal, what is filial, what is meritorious); whereas the completion has its own several attachments: killing, harsh speech, and hatred are completed by hatred, requiring the presence of the extremely coarse and evil mind that spares nothing; stealing, sexual misconduct, and greed are completed by greed, requiring the presence of the extremely defiled mind that clings to something; wrong view is completed by delusion, and the remaining three of speech are granted completion by all three roots. Looking back at an evil deed already done, the reason given when the thought was raised is often presentable, but the mind at the moment the deed was brought off cannot hide itself — this distinction is the most serviceable of all. And the instances of “arising from delusion” that the treatise adduces deserve especially slow reading: that is not muddle-headedness, it is a wrong train of reasoning propped up by sacrifice, by law, and by scripture.
-
The ten paths of action are a coarse net, and one must first know how wide the mesh is. The treatise says expressly that it takes from evil conduct and good conduct only the portion that is “coarse, evident, and easily known”: drinking liquor, beating and binding, kindly speech, and wholesome volitions are not among them, nor is any preparatory or consequent stage. Not to enter the paths of action is not the same as being free of offense — those things are still wholesome or unwholesome actions and still draw their results; they are simply not on this list, which was set up in order “to make men keep away.” In the same way, the single item “not by mistake” runs through all four gates of killing, stealing, sexual misconduct, and false speech: killing by mistake, taking by mistake, acting by mistake, speaking by mistake do not complete a path of action — and that is not a back door opened for them, it is a condition of this list’s own constitution.
One Further Point (Appended): The Difficulty Left Blank
After false speech, the treatise quotes a set of questions and answers of its own: he who is touched by the offense of killing without moving his body is one who utters speech; he who is touched by the offense of false speech without uttering speech is one who moves his body; and those touched by both offenses while neither moving the body nor uttering speech are the seer in a fit of mental wrath and one at the time of the poṣadha. Thereupon the author raises a difficulty against himself: if there is neither movement of body nor utterance of speech, and the desire realm besides has no nonmanifest that arises apart from the manifest, how do these two come to be paths of action? Here the author gives no answer, saying only, “upon a difficulty such as this one should expend some labor.” Fine-meshed as the whole fascicle is, it leaves before its close one plain gap — and that is no oversight, it is a place left unclosed by the author’s own marking. Saṅghabhadra, at the very same difficulty, sets up another explanation, holding that at the preparatory stage there must be a manifest action continuing on; both parties are recorded and neither is adjudicated.
Through the whole fascicle
This fascicle reads like the fine print of the discipline, and its numbers and conditions are startlingly dense; but what bears the weight is not the items, it is the recurring form of the question — at which stage is the mind, upon what object is it turned, and by which root is it completed. The three stages fix its line, the four places fix its object, the three roots fix its completion; and the point where the three intersect is where the offense rests.
And just for that reason, the weightiest precept in the whole fascicle turns out to be the shortest. The first nine paths of action travel the long road of raising the thought, setting the hand to it, bringing it off, and trailing away; but when it comes to the three mental paths of action — greed, hatred, and wrong view — they are the root as soon as they are present, with no preparatory or consequent stage to be divided off. The presence of a single thought and the completion of a whole slaughter stand at the same rank on this table — and that is the sentence which shows itself only when the fascicle has been read to its end.
業道諸門·斷善·三障The Paths of Action through the Several Gates · Cutting Off the Wholesome Roots · The Three Obstructions
全文五層 →Full five layers →十業道的一條一條已在前卷講完,這一卷從「如是已辯十業道相。依何義名業道?」一問起。先立名,次因義便而入邪見斷善根的長行大段,再依次量過思俱轉之數、諸趣諸處、三果與邪命;自「如前所言果有五種」一句起換了一章,把五果配業的六重門逐格說完,再說應作不應作、引滿二業、二無心定,末立三障而問其所在之趣。一卷兼跨兩章之界,是本品科段最密的一卷。
一句話:這一卷不是在列惡的清單,是在替『業』這個字所牽動的每一條線量刻度——量它能斷掉什麼、能在哪裡起、能招來什麼、能與果對上幾格;量到最後,量出三樣擋住聖道的東西。
三個眼目
-
斷與續,用的是同一個門軸。斷善根的條件層層收窄:邪見要「上品圓滿」、要決定撥無因果、要在人趣三洲、要男女之身、要見行之人——少一項都斷不動。而續起來只要一樣東西:「善根斷已由何復續?由疑有見」。一邊要那麼多個『決定』才關得上,另一邊只要一個問號就推得開。所以斷善之體是『非得』而不是別的——「善斷應知非得為體」,善之得不生、非得續生;燈不是被搬走,是不再亮了。判準不在善的多少,在那個『決定』鬆不鬆。 續起來還是頓續而後漸現,論給的譬喻是「如頓除病氣力漸增」——病一下子好,力氣慢慢回。
-
同一批法,換一個門就換一組數。這一卷後半有六重果門(斷道、善等、三世、同地異地、學等、三斷),格子多得像表格,其實問的是同一個三段式:某業以某法為果,能對上五果之中的幾個。答案之所以每門不同,是因為換的不是法,是問法。這一手在前半就示範過一次——諸趣諸處那一段用的是「成就」與「現行」兩把尺,同一條業道可以只成就而不現行。遇到數目不合,第一問不是誰對,是這兩個數用了哪兩把尺。
-
引與滿是兩種分工,門檻也不同。「一業引一生,多業能圓滿」——決定你投生為人的是一個業,決定你這個人長成什麼樣的是無數個業;「雖但一業引一同分,而彼圓滿許由多業」。而能引的門檻遠高於能滿:有異熟只是入場券,還要與業俱有、與業同一果,所以二無心定與『得』雖有異熟也引不動,只能「所餘一切皆通引滿」。投生那一格已經定住,一生之中的每一格都還在填。
一義(附):什麼樣的煩惱才算障
三障之中最耐人尋味的是煩惱障。煩惱有兩類——數行的(恒常生起)與猛利的(上品);而論說「應知此中唯數行者名煩惱障」。為什麼猛的反而不算?「上品煩惱雖復猛利,非恒起故易可伏除」;而「於下品中數行煩惱雖非猛利而難伏除」,理由是「由彼恒行難得便故」——它一直在,你就一直找不到下手的空隙;再由下品生中品、中品生上品,能伏除的道就無從生起。
這一條把一個修行上最常見的錯覺翻了過來:猛而不常的容易對付,弱而常在的才是障。
通於全論
業道之名(後三唯道、前七亦業亦道)是一把往後一直用的尺——凡問『這算不算業道』,就照論給的判準去量:它有沒有真的令內外之物增減。五果配業的六重門,是前品所立五果說的實作演練;學會了那五個問題,往後遇到任何『某業對某法有幾果』都能自己算一遍。三障之立則是一個總標,五無間業的體、破僧、逆緣諸事都在下一卷展開。
還有一件事是這一卷特意留下的線頭。斷善根一段,論主自己說是「已乘義便辯斷善根,今應復明本業道義」——那是一段傍論。可是這段傍論所立的條件(三洲、男女、見行、恩義夠重),到了卷末講無間業誰能造時又原樣被搬出來一次:「即前所說彼無斷善不律儀因,即是此中無逆所以」。能造最重之惡的條件,與能斷最深之善的條件,原來是同一組條件。 一卷之首與一卷之末,就這樣扣在一起。
The ten paths of action have been gone through one by one in the fascicle before; this fascicle sets out from a single question, “the marks of the ten paths of action have now been made out. In what sense are they named paths of action?” First the name is established; then, as the sense conveniently allows, it enters the long prose passage on wrong view cutting off the wholesome roots; then, in order, it takes the measure of the number of paths of action that turn together with volition, of the destinies and the places, of the three results, and of wrong livelihood. From the sentence “as was said above, results are of five kinds” a new chapter begins, and the six gates by which the five results are assigned to action are stated cell by cell; thereafter what ought and ought not to be done, the two actions of projecting and completing, and the two absorptions without mind; and at the last the three obstructions are established and the question is asked in which destinies they are found. One fascicle straddling the boundary of two chapters — this is the most densely outlined fascicle in the whole chapter.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not drawing up a list of evils; it is laying a graduated scale against every line that the one word ‘action’ sets moving — measuring what it can cut off, where it can arise, what it can summon, and how many cells it can match against a result; and at the end of the measuring, three things emerge that block the noble path.
Three Points to Watch
-
Cutting off and restoring turn upon the same hinge. The conditions for cutting off the wholesome roots narrow layer by layer: the wrong view must be “of the high grade and complete,” must decisively deny cause and result, must be in the three continents of the human destiny, must be in the body of a man or a woman, must be in a person who walks by views — let one item be wanting and nothing can be cut off. Whereas for the restoring only one thing is needed: “once the wholesome roots have been cut off, by what are they restored? By doubt and by right view.” On the one side it takes that many ‘decisions’ to shut the door; on the other a single question mark pushes it open. Hence the entity of the cutting off of the wholesome is ‘non-acquisition’ and nothing else — “it should be known that the cutting off of the wholesome has non-acquisition for its entity”: the acquisition of the wholesome does not arise, and non-acquisition arises in its stead; the lamp was not carried away, it simply stopped shining. The measure is not how much of the wholesome there is, but whether that ‘decision’ is loose or tight. And the restoring, too, is all at once and only thereafter manifests by degrees; the simile the treatise gives is “as when illness is removed all at once and strength returns by degrees” — the sickness ends in a moment, the strength comes back slowly.
-
One and the same set of dharmas gets a new set of numbers when the gate is changed. The latter half of this fascicle has six gates of result (the path that cuts off, the wholesome and the rest, the three times, the same and a different level, the learner and the rest, the three abandonings); the cells are as many as a table, yet what is asked is one and the same three-part question: such an action has such a dharma for its result — how many of the five results can it match? The answer differs at each gate because what is changed is not the dharmas but the way of asking. The move was already demonstrated once in the first half: the passage on the destinies and the places uses two rules, ‘possession’ and ‘being in act’, and one and the same path of action may be possessed without being in act. Whenever the numbers do not agree, the first question is not who is right but which two rules these two numbers were taken with.
-
Projecting and completing are two divisions of labor, and their thresholds differ too. “One action projects one birth, and many actions can complete it” — what settles that you are born a human is one action; what settles what sort of human you grow into is a countless number of actions; “though it is only one action that projects one commonality, yet the completing of that commonality is allowed to be by many actions.” And the threshold for projecting is far higher than that for completing: having a maturation is only the ticket of entry; the thing must also be coexistent with action and share one result with action, and so the two absorptions without mind and ‘acquisition,’ though they have maturation, cannot project, and only “all the rest extend alike to projecting and completing.” That one cell, the birth you take, is already fixed; every cell within that life is still being filled in.
One Further Point (Appended): What Kind of Affliction Counts as an Obstruction
Of the three obstructions the most worth pondering is the obstruction of the afflictions. Afflictions are of two classes — those of frequent occurrence (arising constantly) and those that are fierce (of the high grade); and the treatise says that “it should be known that here only those of frequent occurrence are named the obstruction of the afflictions.” Why should the fierce ones not count? “The afflictions of the high grade, though fierce, are easily subdued and removed because they do not arise constantly”; whereas “among those of the low grade, the afflictions of frequent occurrence, though not fierce, are hard to subdue and remove,” the reason being “because their constant occurrence makes an opening hard to come by” — they are there all the time, and so all the time you can find no gap in which to take hold; and then the low grade produces the middle, and the middle the high, so that the path able to subdue and remove them has no chance to arise.
This one point turns over the commonest illusion in practice: what is fierce but occasional is easy to deal with; what is feeble but constant is the real obstruction.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The name ‘path of action’ (the last three being path alone, the first seven both action and path) is a rule that goes on being used ever after — whenever it is asked whether a thing counts as a path of action, one measures it by the standard the treatise gives: has it really made the things within and without decrease or increase? The six gates assigning the five results to action are a working exercise upon the doctrine of the five results established in the previous chapter; learn those five questions, and thereafter, meeting any question of the form ‘how many results has such an action with respect to such a dharma,’ one can work it out for oneself. The establishing of the three obstructions is a general heading, and the entity of the five deeds of immediate retribution, the splitting of the Saṅgha, and all the matters of the conditions for such crimes are unfolded in the next fascicle.
There is one further loose thread this fascicle deliberately leaves. Of the passage on cutting off the wholesome roots the author himself says, “having taken the sense as it conveniently allowed and made out the cutting off of the wholesome roots, now the sense of the paths of action proper should be made clear again” — that was an incidental discussion. Yet the conditions established in that incidental discussion (the three continents, man and woman, walking by views, kindness weighty enough) are brought out again word for word at the end of the fascicle, where it treats who can commit the deeds of immediate retribution: “just that which was said before, that they have no cause of cutting off the wholesome roots and of taking on non-discipline, is here the reason why they commit no deed of immediate retribution.” The conditions for committing the gravest evil turn out to be the very same set of conditions as those for cutting off the deepest wholesome. The head of the fascicle and the end of the fascicle are buckled together just so.
五無間·破僧·相業·施戒修The Five Deeds of Immediate Retribution · Splitting the Saṅgha · The Action Producing the Marks · Giving, Discipline, and Cultivation
全文五層 →Full five layers →業品六卷至此收束。此卷承三重障而別出業障之體,從「於前所辯三重障中,說五無間為業障體」一句起,前半用八頌之力專辯破僧(體、能破之人、處所人數時限、不能破的六個時位),次明害母等成逆之緣與五無間同類;後半忽然翻到另一端,講菩薩妙相業與三無數劫,再講施戒修三福業事,終於「善無漏名妙」一頌之諸法異名。
一句話:這一卷是業論的兩個端點——最深的一格是那一句破僧的誑語,最高的一格是三無數劫積成的六度圓滿;而論主反覆證明的只有一件事:兩端的重量都不在事相的大小上,在田、在心、在所壞或所成的那個東西上。
三個眼目
-
最重的罪,體卻是無記的。僧破本身「僧破體是不和合性,無覆無記心不相應行蘊所攝」,既不善也不惡;而且「非能破者成此僧破,但是所破僧眾所成」——法在被破的僧眾那一邊,罪在破者這一邊。破者所成的只是一句誑語,它感無間地獄一中劫。一個無記的法,因一句話而成為最重之罪的果——這是全論處理「事」與「罪」分家最極端的一次示範。同一手法後面再現於捨類福與受類福之分。
-
每一個「最」字都要先問『在哪一個範圍裡最』。破僧最重、意罰最大、邪見最重,三句經文彼此像是打架,論主一句話收拾:據五無間說破僧重,約三罰業說意罪大,就五僻見說邪見重。善的一端也一樣——感第一有的思是世善中果最大者,但那是就異熟果說;若論離繫果,最大的是金剛喻定相應之思,所以頌要加「世善」二字作簡別。判準先於結論,這是讀本卷任何一組比較的鑰匙。
-
福德的樞紐一律收在心的那一剎那。施的體不是所施之物,而是「捨具名施,謂由此具捨事得成,故捨所由是真施體」,其根繫於「謂無貪俱能起此聚」一句;因怖畏、希求、貪而捨,物照樣出去卻不入施格。惡田能不能得好果,判準也在心不在田——「非由田力,種果有倒」,田的過失只減收成,不改果的性質。連妙相業這種極長時量之修,樞紐也只是「唯現對佛,緣佛起思是思所成,非聞修類」的那一念思。
一義(附):業還攔不攔得住
本卷給了兩條相反的線,合看才完整。
一條說攔不住:「無間加行若必定成,中間決無離染得果」。其餘惡業道,加行中間若聖道生起,業道就完不成;唯獨無間加行,一旦必定成,聖道也插不進來。「無間」二字不只指果報無間,連因位上也不容間隔。
另一條說攔得住:造作業與增長業之別由五因判,其中一因是無惡作對治——一個追悔、一個對治,業就停在「造作」而不成「增長」,「未圓滿時但名造作不名增長」。追悔與對治在此不是心理安慰,是五因之一的實際缺口。
兩條線劃出的那一段,正是本論給修行者的可作為之地:在加行尚未必定成之前,攔截是可能的;一旦必定成,就只剩承受。 業品全部的細密辨析,最後都是為了讓讀者認得出自己此刻站在哪一段。
三處並錄不判
本卷論主三次列出異說而一次判語也沒有下——一一福量三說、戒淨二異說、梵福量二說,末後一處以「等言為顯如是異說」收之。三處所爭並不同科:福量與梵福量二處爭的是量,戒淨一處爭的是戒淨之因與戒之種類。這不是含糊,是體例:異說有據而論主無判,即並錄而不強為之判。讀本論而遇不下判語處,要看的是論主在該處究竟有沒有下判語。
通於全論
五無間與其同類是「重」的極限刻度,妙相業與六度四位是「勝」的極限刻度;業之輕重六因、造作與增長五因,則是這把尺的刻度規則——後面隨眠品談煩惱之增減、賢聖品談三位業障之轉,用的都是這一套。
『將得忍、將得不還、將得無學』三個時位業最為障,是修行地圖上的三個關口預告,賢聖品會逐一走到。順福分、順解脫分、順決擇分三善則接得更直——順決擇分即煖等四位,論在此明言「後當廣說」,那是下一段路。而順解脫分善的自驗徵相——聞說生死有過、諸法無我、涅槃有德而身毛豎立悲泣墮淚——是本卷留給讀者最私人的一句:「此善生已,令彼有情名為身中有涅槃法」。
最後,六波羅蜜多之得名在此立定——「能到自所往圓德彼岸,故此六名曰波羅蜜多」;而全品收於「以無一法能勝涅槃,是善是常超眾法故」與「餘法有上,義准已成」。一頭是壞法輪的那一夜,一頭是超眾法的那一法;業品六卷的全部計量,最後就落在這一組對照上。
The six fascicles of the Chapter on Action are gathered to their close here. This fascicle takes up the three obstructions and singles out from them the entity of the obstruction of action, beginning from the sentence “among the three obstructions adjudged above, it was said that the five deeds of immediate retribution are the entity of the obstruction of action.” The first half spends the force of eight stanzas upon the splitting of the Saṅgha alone (its entity; the person able to split; the place, the number, and the term of time; the six occasions on which no splitting can occur); it then makes clear the conditions by which killing one’s mother and the rest become deeds of immediate retribution, and the class that is like the five. The latter half turns of a sudden to the opposite end and speaks of the bodhisattva’s action producing the excellent marks and of the three incalculable aeons, and then of the three bases of meritorious action, giving, discipline, and cultivation, closing at last with the divergent names of dharmas in the stanza “the wholesome without outflows is called excellent.”
In one sentence: This fascicle is the two extreme ends of the treatment of action — the deepest notch is that one lying sentence that splits the Saṅgha, the highest notch is the fulfillment of the six pāramitās amassed through three incalculable aeons; and the one thing the author proves over and over is this alone: the weight at either end lies not in the size of the deed, but in the field, in the mind, and in the thing that is destroyed or brought to fullness.
Three Points to Watch
-
The heaviest of offenses, and yet its entity is indeterminate. The split in the Saṅgha is itself such that “the entity of the split in the Saṅgha is the nature of non-concord; it is gathered under the aggregate of formations, unobscured-indeterminate and not associated with mind” — it is neither wholesome nor unwholesome; and further, “it is not the one who splits that possesses this split in the Saṅgha; it is possessed only by the Saṅgha that is split” — the dharma lies on the side of the Saṅgha that is split, the offense on the side of the one who splits. What the splitter accomplishes is only a single lie, and it draws down an intermediate aeon in the hell without interval. An indeterminate dharma becomes, through one sentence, the result of the heaviest of offenses — this is the most extreme demonstration in the whole treatise of parting “the thing” from “the offense.” The same move appears again later in the division between the merit of the class of relinquishing and the merit of the class of enjoyment.
-
Every “most” must first be asked, “most within which range?” Splitting the Saṅgha is the heaviest, the punishment of mind is the greatest, wrong view is the heaviest — three sentences of scripture that look as though they were fighting one another, and the author settles them in a single line: with regard to the five deeds of immediate retribution, splitting the Saṅgha is the heaviest; with regard to the three punitive actions, the offense of mind is the greatest; with regard to the five deviant views, wrong view is the heaviest. It is the same at the wholesome end — the volition that draws down the foremost existence is the greatest in result among worldly wholesome things, but that is said with regard to the result of maturation; if the result of release from bondage is in question, the greatest is the volition associated with the vajra-like concentration, and so the stanza must add the two words “worldly wholesome” to mark the distinction. The measure comes before the conclusion — this is the key to every comparison in this fascicle.
-
The pivot of merit is invariably gathered into a single moment of mind. The entity of giving is not the thing given but rather “the equipment of relinquishing is called giving; that is, it is by this equipment that the act of relinquishing is accomplished, and so that by which one relinquishes is the true entity of giving,” whose root is fastened to the sentence “it is what, together with non-greed, is able to raise this collection”; where one relinquishes out of fear, out of hope, out of greed, the goods go out just the same and yet do not enter the square of giving. Whether a bad field can yield a good result is likewise settled by the mind and not by the field — “it is not by the power of the field that seed and fruit are inverted”; a fault in the field only reduces the harvest, it does not alter the nature of the result. Even in the action producing the excellent marks, a cultivation of the very longest span of time, the pivot is only that one thought of volition that is “only in the direct presence of a Buddha, the volition arisen with a Buddha for its object, formed through reflection and not of the classes formed through hearing or through cultivation.”
One Further Point (Appended): Whether Action Can Still Be Headed Off
This fascicle gives two lines running in opposite directions, and only taken together are they complete.
One says that it cannot be headed off: “if the preparation for a deed of immediate retribution is bound to be accomplished, then in the interval there is definitely no freeing from defilement and no gaining of a fruit.” With the other paths of unwholesome action, if the noble path arises in the midst of the preparation, the path of action is not completed; only with the preparation for a deed of immediate retribution, once it is bound to be accomplished, can even the noble path not be inserted. The two words “immediate retribution” point not only to a retribution that follows without interval but to a causal stage that admits of no interval either.
The other says that it can be headed off: the difference between action that is done and action that is increased is adjudged by five causes, and one of those causes is the absence of regret and of counteraction — one act of remorse, one counteragent, and the action stops at “done” and does not become “increased”; “so long as it is not complete it is called only done and is not called increased.” Remorse and counteraction are here not psychological consolation; they are an actual gap in one of the five causes.
The stretch marked out by these two lines is precisely the ground of possible action that the treatise offers to one who practices: before the preparation is bound to be accomplished, interception is possible; once it is bound to be accomplished, only the bearing of it remains. All the fine-grained adjudication of the Chapter on Action is in the end for the sake of letting the reader recognize which stretch he is standing in at this moment.
Three Places Recorded without Adjudication
Three times in this fascicle the author sets out divergent accounts and passes not one sentence of judgment — the three accounts of the measure of a single merit, the two divergent accounts of purity of discipline, and the two accounts of the measure of the merit of Brahmā, the last of them closed with “the word ‘and the rest’ is to display divergent accounts such as these.” What is at issue in the three places is not of one kind: at the measure of merit and the measure of the merit of Brahmā what is disputed is a quantity, while at purity of discipline what is disputed is the cause of purity of discipline and the kinds of discipline. This is not vagueness but form: where a divergent account has warrant and the author passes no judgment, both are recorded and no judgment is forced upon them. In reading this treatise, when one meets a place where no judgment is passed, what is to be looked at is whether the author did or did not, in that very place, pass a judgment.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The five deeds of immediate retribution and the class that is like them are the limiting graduation of “heavy”; the action producing the excellent marks and the six pāramitās in their four stages are the limiting graduation of “excellent”; and the six causes of the lightness or heaviness of an action, together with the five causes of action done and action increased, are the rules by which that ruler is graduated — the Chapter on the Latent Tendencies, when it treats the increase and decrease of the afflictions, and the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble, when it treats the turning of the obstruction of action at the three stages, both use this same set.
The three occasions “when one is about to gain receptivity, about to gain non-return, about to gain the state beyond learning,” at which action is the greatest obstruction, are three passes announced in advance upon the map of practice, and the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble will walk up to each of them in turn. The three wholesome things conducive to merit, to liberation, and to penetration join on even more directly — what is conducive to penetration is just the four stages of warmth and the rest, of which the treatise says expressly here that they “will be explained at length later on,” and that is the next stretch of the road. And the sign by which the wholesome conducive to liberation may be verified in oneself — that on hearing that birth and death have fault, that dharmas are without self, that nirvāṇa has virtue, the hairs of the body stand up and one weeps and sheds tears — is the most personal sentence this fascicle leaves to its reader: “once this wholesome has arisen, it makes that sentient being one who is said to have the dharma of nirvāṇa within his body.”
Last of all, the six pāramitās receive their name here — “because they are able to reach the far shore of the fullness of virtue toward which they go, these six are called pāramitā”; and the whole chapter closes with “since there is no single dharma that can surpass nirvāṇa, it being wholesome and permanent and passing beyond the host of dharmas” and “that the remaining dharmas have something above them is established by inference from the sense.” At one end is that one night in which the wheel of Dharma was broken, at the other that one dharma which passes beyond the host of dharmas; and all the measuring of the six fascicles of the Chapter on Action comes to rest at last upon this one pairing.
隨眠體·諸門分別(前五門)The Nature of the Latent Tendencies · Distinctions through the Several Gates (the First Five Gates)
全文五層 →Full five layers →業品講完了業,卻不收在業上。這一卷的第一句逐字接著上一品的末尾——世間的差別由業而生,而業要靠隨眠才長得起來,離了隨眠,業就沒有招感後有的能力。於是全卷從一問起:隨眠有幾?答案走了四步——六、七、十、九十八;然後辨見修所斷、五見自體、四顛倒、七慢九慢;再轉入諸門分別,本卷走完前五門,末附一節四種記門,卷就收了。
一句話:這一卷不是在數煩惱,是在示範同一批煩惱怎麼因為換一把尺而換一個數——六變七換的是貪,七變十換的是見,十變九十八一次換了三把(行、部、界)。凡遇數目對不上,第一問不是誰錯,是這幾項各用了哪一把尺。
三個眼目
-
『有』與『現行』是兩件事。全卷最密的一場諍——隨眠是心相應還是不相應——最後停在經部的一個分位上:煩惱在睡位叫隨眠,在覺位叫纏;睡是「不現行種子隨逐」,覺是「諸煩惱現起纏心」。所以經說樂受上『有』貪隨眠,並不等於那時貪正在活動——「經但說有,不言爾時即有隨眠」。這條分辨後面又用了兩次:聖者身中『有』殺生等纏而必不現行;隨眠緣得到某境,未必就能在那境上隨增。承認一物存在,不等於承認它正在作用。
-
判一個惑,看的是它從哪裡生,不是看它談什麼題目。戒禁取把非因執為因,題目明明是『因』,卻不歸見集所斷——因為執因之前必先「計度彼體是常一我作者」,見苦時常執我執一斷,因執就跟著落。同一手在『聖有而不起』一節再現:那些惑之所以起不來,不是被直接對治了,是「見疑所增故」——養它的那個先斷了。斷一個煩惱,未必要正面撞它。
-
煩惱要長膘,得先有一層『我的』。隨增一門給了一對極好的譬喻:被這一地的身見與愛攝為己有的法,煩惱緣它才增得起來,「如衣潤濕埃塵隨住」;無漏與上地之法不被攝為己有而且相違,緣它也黏不住,「如於炎石足不隨住」。所以六緣無漏、九緣上界的惑,於所緣境「無隨增義」;而嚮往上地的心,論還特地撇清一句——「是善法欲,非謂隨眠」。判準不在境的高低,在那境有沒有被認作『我的』。
一義(附):論主為什麼在此下了一句評語
本論在許多諍處只錄二造而不判勝負,此卷卻有一處例外——隨眠相應之諍,三方各說盡了理由之後,論主逕下一句「然經部師所說最善」。
它所取的說法其實只有一個要點:隨眠不是另一個東西。既非心相應、亦非心不相應,因為「無別物故」——是同一個煩惱的兩個分位。撐住這一說的是兩個比喻:記憶的種子由曾經證知而生、又能生後來的憶念,沒有人會說它是另一個實物;芽由前果生、又能生後果,也是一樣。於是經部反問:既然念種只是功能,煩惱種為什麼非得另立一個不相應的實體?「差別因緣不可得故。」
要留意這一句評語的重量。它不是把另二方說錯了——毘婆沙師的三事之證、難方拆證的那一手(不承認前提,證自落空),本卷都一字不省地錄了下來。論主評取一說,與論主錄全二造,是可以並行的兩件事。
通於全論
六、七、十、九十八這四個數,以及五部三界的那張表,是後面兩卷(惑之能繫、隨增、次第)與整個『明惑滅』大文所要反覆取數的地基。遍行十一是其中最常被搬走的一組;緣無漏之六與緣上界之九,也在隨增一門立刻回用。
還有兩件事是這一卷留給讀者的線頭。其一,論主評取經部之說,而系內的反破恰恰最烈地落在同一句上——造論體例所記的『立薩婆多義,隨有僻處以經部義破之』,在此可以看見它長什麼樣,也可以看見它引來了什麼回應。其二,戒禁取所斷一段,論主連設六問而終以「故所執義應更思擇」收尾,未下結論;古德於此亦未代為收束。論自己標明未決之處,讀者不必替它結案。
The Chapter on Action finished speaking of action, yet did not close upon action. The first sentence of this fascicle follows word for word upon the end of the chapter before it — the differences of the world arise from action, and action grows only when the latent tendencies sustain it; parted from the latent tendencies, action has no power to call forth a coming existence. From there the whole fascicle proceeds from one question: how many are the latent tendencies? The answer walks four steps — six, seven, ten, ninety-eight; then it analyzes what is abandoned through seeing and through cultivation, the entities of the five views, the four inversions, the seven prides and the nine classes of pride; then it turns into the distinctions through the several gates, of which this fascicle walks the first five, appends a section on the four gates of determination, and the fascicle closes.
In one sentence: this fascicle is not counting afflictions; it is demonstrating how one and the same set of afflictions changes its number because the measuring rod has been changed — six becomes seven by changing the rod of greed, seven becomes ten by changing the rod of view, ten becomes ninety-eight by changing three rods at once (mode, category, realm). Whenever the numbers do not tally, the first question is not who has erred, but which rod each of these items has used.
Three Points to Watch
-
“There is” and “is active” are two different things. The densest dispute of the whole fascicle — whether the latent tendencies are associated with mind or not associated with it — comes at last to rest upon a distinction of stages made by the Sautrāntikas: an affliction in the stage of sleep is called a latent tendency, and in the stage of waking it is called an entanglement; sleep is “a seed following along without being active,” waking is “the afflictions arisen and entangling the mind.” Hence when the sūtra says that upon a pleasant feeling “there is” a latent tendency of greed, that does not mean that greed is at that moment at work — “the sūtra says only that there is one; it does not say that there is a latent tendency at that very moment.” This distinction is used twice more further on: in the noble one there “are” the entanglement of killing and the rest, and yet they are definitely not active; and a latent tendency may reach an object and still be unable to increase by attachment upon that object. To grant that a thing exists is not to grant that it is at work.
-
In adjudging an affliction, what one looks at is where it arises from, not what topic it talks about. Adherence to observances and vows holds what is not a cause to be a cause; the topic is plainly “cause,” and yet it is not classed as abandoned by seeing origination — because before one holds a thing to be a cause one must first “deliberate that its entity is eternal, one, a self, and an agent,” and when at the seeing of suffering the holding to eternity and to self is cut off, the holding to a cause falls away with it. The same move recurs in the section on “the noble one has them and yet they do not arise”: those afflictions cannot arise not because they were directly counteracted, but because “they are increased by view and doubt” — what fed them was cut off first. To cut off an affliction, one need not always strike it head-on.
-
For an affliction to grow fat, there must first be a layer of “mine.” The gate of increase by attachment gives an excellent pair of similes: a dharma appropriated as its own by the view of self and the craving of this level is one upon which an affliction taking it as object can increase, “as when a garment is damp the dust follows and stays upon it”; the dharmas without outflows and those of an upper level are not appropriated as one’s own and are moreover contrary to it, so that an affliction taking them as object cannot cling, “as upon a burning stone the foot does not stay.” Hence the six that take the dharmas without outflows as object and the nine that take an upper realm as object have, upon their object-fields, “no sense of increase by attachment”; and of the mind that aspires to an upper level the treatise expressly clears the ground with one sentence — “that is the desire for wholesome dharmas, and is not called a latent tendency.” The criterion is not the height of the object, but whether that object has been taken to be “mine.”
One Further Point (Appended): Why the Author Passes a Verdict Here
In many disputed places this treatise records the two parties only and does not adjudge which prevails; in this fascicle there is one exception — in the dispute over whether the latent tendencies are associated with mind, after all three parties have said out their reasons, the author lays down one sentence directly: “yet what the Sautrāntika masters say is the best.”
The account he takes has in truth only one main point: a latent tendency is not another thing. It is neither associated with mind nor dissociated from mind, because “there is no separate thing” — it is one and the same affliction in two stages. What holds this account up is two similes: the seed of memory arises from having once known and can produce a later act of recollection, and no one would say that it is a separate real thing; a sprout arises from a former fruit and can produce a later fruit, and it is the same. Whereupon the Sautrāntikas ask in return: if the seed of memory is a mere capability, why must the seed of an affliction have a further dissociated entity set up for it? “Because the causal ground of a difference between them cannot be found.”
The weight of this verdict is worth noting. It does not put the other two parties in the wrong — the Vaibhāṣikas’ proof from three functions, and the objector’s move of dismantling that proof (deny the premise and the proof falls of itself), are both set down in this fascicle without the omission of a single word. That the author takes one account, and that the author records both parties in full, are two things that can go together.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The four numbers six, seven, ten, and ninety-eight, together with that table of the five categories and the three realms, are the ground from which the two fascicles that follow (how the afflictions bind, increase by attachment, sequence) and the whole main division on “the extinction of the afflictions” will draw their numbers again and again. The eleven all-pervading are the set most often carried off; the six that take the dharmas without outflows as object and the nine that take an upper realm as object are put back to work at once in the gate of increase by attachment.
Two further things this fascicle leaves the reader as loose threads. First, the author takes the Sautrāntika account, and the counter-refutation within the lineage falls most fiercely upon that very sentence — the manner of composition recorded of him, “to set up the Sarvāstivāda sense and, wherever there is a bias, to refute it by the Sautrāntika sense,” can here be seen for what it looks like, and so can the response it drew. Second, in the section on what abandons adherence to observances and vows, the author poses six questions in a row and ends with “therefore the sense here held should be further examined,” passing no conclusion; nor did the ancient masters close it on his behalf. Where the treatise itself marks a place as unsettled, the reader need not close the case for it.
惑能繫·三世實有·惑隨增·漏瀑流軛取How the Afflictions Bind · Real Existence in the Three Times · Increase by Attachment · Outflows, Torrents, Yokes, and Appropriations
全文五層 →Full five layers →論主以一句定義開卷——隨眠於此事上隨增,即名繫此事——隨即問三世之中何等隨眠能繫何事。問既涉去來,遂逼出一段傍論:三世之法是不是實有。有部立宗、部內四家建立三世、論主逐句廣破、經部以『曾有當有』總答,末以「此法性甚深」收。傍論已了,回到正論:斷而非離繫、十六法十六識境、有隨眠心之二、十隨眠次第、起惑三因緣,末以漏瀑流軛取之物數與隨眠等訓詞收卷。
一句話:這一卷把全論最大的一場部派之諍與全論最細的一組數目表裝在同一卷裡——爭的是『有沒有』,數的是『有幾個』;爭的那一頭論主不判,數的那一頭一格不含糊。
位置(先立)
本卷即玄奘卷二十之全。三家古德在此各自分卷,卷界與玄奘全同,並皆判本卷為本品第六大科——光記標「此下第六明惑」,寶疏標「已下大文第六明世縛事通局」,頌疏標「從此第六,明惑能繫」。大科之下的分數則二式:光記與頌疏各分為二(約世明繫、約斷明繫),寶疏獨開四科(世縛通局、證三世有、建立三世、破三世有),其後三科恰對立宗、四家、廣破三段。本卷開卷無承轉套語,收卷落在訓詞之末,其後即卷尾題;『纏』之訓詁不在本卷而在下卷,光記自標「纏後別明,故此不問」——古德科界與譯本段界在此三方相合。真諦舊譯此品不作『隨眠』而作『惑』,只分二卷,本卷所對之段橫跨其兩卷之界;分卷是譯場之事,不是科段之證。
三個眼目
-
一問逼出一諍,而論主不代結。問『過去的隨眠能繫什麼事』,等於預設過去有事可繫;於是必須先辨去來有無。有部給了兩重教證(佛教人於過去色勤修厭捨、識由二緣生)與兩重理證(識起必有境、已謝業有當果),部內又有四家建立三世——法救以類、妙音以相、世友以位、覺天以待,而論主評取第三,以其「彼謂諸法作用未有名為未來,有作用時名為現在,作用已滅名為過去,非體有殊」。隨即又以整整一頌逐句破這第三家:何礙用、用云何、無異、世便壞、有誰未生滅。破到極處,論不下判,只讓有部說一句「此法性甚深」就散場。三疏於這一段的問答繫屬完全一致(破方一律標經部、救方一律標有部),頌疏更於頌首總斷「前三句經部破,第四句有宗答」——連末句『甚深』二字都明標為薩婆多之救,不是論主的結論。承其收束之姿,不代其結,是讀本卷的分寸。
-
爭完『有沒有』,就開始數『有幾個』——而數的骨架是開合,不是堆積。十六法十六識之表,規則只有一條:能緣者限同界或上界,再加一個無漏;於是欲界五、色界八、無色界十,見滅見道所斷各再加緣自部之識。漏、瀑流、軛、取四門更明白——它們不是四批東西,是同一堆惑按四種取義重新編組,體則「應知四軛與瀑流同,四取應知體同四軛」;四十一、五十二、二十九、二十八、三十六、十五、三十四、三十八諸數之所以不同,全在『見』與『無明』兩項的開與合。凡算不攏,多半是漏看了『除癡』或『析見』一句。而論主自己也知道表會嚇跑人,所以先造一部『略毘婆沙』,說明白:「而能越渡大大問流」——少費功力而渡大問。
-
本卷的術語都在教同一件事:隨眠是潛勢,不是現行。開頭分自相惑與共相惑,判準不在所緣而在起不起;未來五識相應的貪瞋,可生者只繫一世、注定不生者反遍繫三世——因為它沒有落點,只作潛勢而普遍地繫。中間辨『有隨眠』與『隨增』二義不同:伴著未必增著。末後四個訓詞把這一義說到底——「行相難知故名微細」、能於所緣及所相應增惛滯故名二隨增、恒隨有情故名隨逐、費力遮它而它屢起故名隨縛。察不出、增不停、甩不掉、壓不住:這就是為什麼隨眠要斷,而不是壓。
一義(附):那一句『甚深』究竟是誰的話
本論在傍論末後錄毘婆沙師之結,說去來如現實有,其中不能通釋處,愛惜自己的人應當知道「法性甚深非尋思境」。頌疏明標這是薩婆多之救。而眾賢《順正理論》讀到此處反應最烈,逕判論主此語為『詭設謗言』——意思是:這句收場話並不是有部自己說得出的,是論主替他們安上去的。同一句話,本論作有部之救,頌疏標薩婆多救,眾賢則指為論主之設詞。三方所見不同,並錄不判;讀者由此可知,本卷末後那一句的歸屬,本身就是一個有來歷的爭點。
通於全卷
本卷有兩個小地方值得回頭再看。一是那兩塊『非本頌』——一首是論主引來破有部的頌(「許法體恒有,而說性非常」),一首是把十六法十六識重新攝成的提要頌(光記標作「說頌重攝。總結」,寶疏標作「此兩行頌重述前義」)。判它們不是本頌,靠的是前文之徵而不是義理猜測;這一分辨看似瑣碎,卻是讀論不把別人的話當作論的話的第一道關。
二是全卷收尾那個譬喻。論主在訓完漏字之後,另出一個更善之釋,並引契經作證:逆著水流拉船,縱使用大力氣行去仍難;順流放船,即使捨了力氣行去也不難——起善心與起染心,正是這樣。三世有無可以爭,物數開合可以爭,而順流易、逆流難這一件事,兩造都不會爭。一卷之中爭了那麼久,末後落回一句人人可驗的話,這個收法不是偶然。
The author opens the fascicle with a single definition — a latent tendency increasing by attachment upon this thing is just what is named binding this thing — and at once asks which latent tendencies among the three times can bind which things. The question touching past and future, it forces out an incidental discussion: are the dharmas of the three times really existent? The Sarvāstivādins establish their tenet, four masters within the school establish the three times, the author refutes at length line by line, the Sautrāntikas answer comprehensively by “having once been and being to be,” and it closes with 「此法性甚深」 tr. “the nature of this dharma is profound.” The incidental discussion finished, it returns to the main argument: abandoned and yet not released from bondage, the sixteen dharmas as object-fields of the sixteen consciousnesses, the two kinds of mind possessed of latent tendencies, the order of the ten latent tendencies, the three causes and conditions of an affliction’s arising; and it closes the fascicle with the number of items under the outflows, torrents, yokes, and appropriations and the glosses on the names of the latent tendencies and the rest.
In one sentence: This fascicle packs into one fascicle the greatest dispute between the schools in the whole treatise and the finest set of numerical tables in the whole treatise — what is disputed is “whether there is,” what is counted is “how many there are”; and on the disputing side the author passes no verdict, while on the counting side not one square is blurred.
Placement (established first)
This fascicle is the whole of Xuanzang’s Fascicle Twenty. The three ancient masters each divide their fascicles here, their boundaries wholly the same as Xuanzang’s, and all adjudge this fascicle to be the sixth main division of this chapter — Puguang marks 「此下第六明惑」 tr. “below, the sixth, explaining the afflictions,” Fabao marks 「已下大文第六明世縛事通局」 tr. “from here below, the sixth of the main text, explaining the general and particular extent of the binding of things across the times,” Yuanhui marks 「從此第六,明惑能繫」 tr. “from here the sixth, explaining that the afflictions can bind.” Beneath the main division the number of divisions runs in two patterns: Puguang and Yuanhui each divide it into two (explaining binding with reference to the times, and with reference to abandonment), while Fabao alone opens four (the extent of binding across the times, proving that the three times exist, establishing the three times, refuting the existence of the three times), his latter three answering exactly to the three passages of the establishing of the tenet, the four masters, and the refutation at length. This fascicle opens without any transitional formula, and closes at the end of the glosses, followed immediately by the end-title of the fascicle; the gloss on “entanglement” falls not in this fascicle but in the next, Puguang marking of himself 「纏後別明,故此不問」 tr. “the entanglements are explained separately later, and so are not asked after here” — the boundary of the ancient masters’ outline and the boundary of the translations coinciding here on three sides. Paramārtha’s earlier translation gives this chapter not as “latent tendency” but as “affliction,” and divides it into two fascicles only, so that the stretch answering to this fascicle straddles a boundary between two of his; the division into fascicles is a matter of the translation bureau and not evidence of doctrinal sections.
Three Points to Watch
-
One question forces out one dispute, and the author does not conclude for either party. To ask “what things can a past latent tendency bind” is to presuppose that the past has things to be bound; and so one must first make out whether past and future exist. The Sarvāstivādins give two proofs from teaching (the Buddha teaching men to strive to cultivate disgust with and abandonment of past form; a consciousness arising from two conditions) and two from principle (a consciousness when it arises must have its object-field; an action already perished has a coming result), and within the school four masters establish the three times — Dharmatrāta by class, Ghoṣa by mark, Vasumitra by position, Buddhadeva by relation — and the author assesses and takes the third, on the ground that 「彼謂諸法作用未有名為未來,有作用時名為現在,作用已滅名為過去,非體有殊」 tr. “his meaning is that when the function of dharmas is not yet present they are called future, at the time when there is function they are called present, and when the function has ceased they are called past, the entity not being distinct.” And then he uses a whole stanza to refute that third master line by line: what obstructs the function, what time the function is, no distinction, time collapses, who is unarisen or ceased. Refuting to the utmost, the treatise passes no verdict, and merely lets the Sarvāstivādins say one sentence, 「此法性甚深」 tr. “the nature of this dharma is profound,” and the party breaks up. The three commentaries agree completely in their attribution of question and answer through this passage (the refuting party uniformly marked the Sautrāntikas, the defending party uniformly the Sarvāstivādins), and Yuanhui moreover passes a general adjudication at the head of the stanza, 「前三句經部破,第四句有宗答」 tr. “the first three lines are the Sautrāntikas refuting, the fourth line the answer of the school that holds existence” — even the two characters “profound” in the last line being expressly marked a Sarvāstivādin defense and not the author’s conclusion. To carry on the posture of his closing without carrying his conclusion for him is the measure for reading this fascicle.
-
The dispute over “whether there is” done, the counting of “how many there are” begins — and the skeleton of the counting is opening and gathering, not heaping up. For the table of sixteen dharmas and sixteen consciousnesses the rule is one only: what can take them as object is limited to the same realm or a higher one, plus one without outflows; and so the desire realm has five, the form realm eight, the formless ten, with one consciousness taking its own category as object added for what is abandoned through the seeing of cessation and of the path. The four gates of outflow, torrent, yoke, and appropriation are plainer still — they are not four batches of things but one heap of afflictions regrouped under four senses of the term, their entity being such that 「應知四軛與瀑流同,四取應知體同四軛」 tr. “it should be known that the four yokes are the same as the torrents, and the four appropriations should be known to be the same in entity as the four yokes”; and the reason the numbers forty-one, fifty-two, twenty-nine, twenty-eight, thirty-six, fifteen, thirty-four, and thirty-eight differ lies wholly in the opening and gathering of the two items “view” and “ignorance.” Wherever the reckoning will not come out, it is most often because one has overlooked the phrase “delusion excepted” or “view drawn out.” And the author himself knows that a table will frighten readers off, and so he first composes a “brief Vibhāṣā” and states it plainly: 「而能越渡大大問流」 tr. “and one is able to cross the very great flood of questions” — little labor spent, and a great question crossed.
-
The technical terms of this fascicle are all teaching one and the same thing: a latent tendency is a potency, not an activity. It opens by dividing the afflictions of individual and of common characteristic, the criterion lying not in the object taken but in whether they arise; of the greed and hatred associated with the five consciousnesses in the future, those that may arise bind one time alone while those settled not to arise bind all three times throughout — because they have no place to fall, and bind universally simply as a potency. In the middle it makes out that “possessed of latent tendencies” and “increase by attachment” are two different senses: accompanying does not necessarily mean increasing. And at the end the four glosses state that sense to the bottom — 「行相難知故名微細」 tr. “because its mode of apprehension is hard to be aware of it is called subtle”; because it can increase torpor and clogging upon what is taken as object and upon what it is associated with it is called twofold increase by attachment; because it constantly follows after a sentient being it is called following after; because it appears again and again though one spends strength to block it it is called binding along. Undetectable, unceasing in its increase, not to be shaken off, not to be pressed down: this is why the latent tendencies must be abandoned and not merely suppressed.
One Further Point (Appended): Whose Sentence “Profound” Really Is
At the end of the incidental discussion this treatise records the Vaibhāṣika masters’ closing, that past and future are really existent as the present is, and that wherever within this something cannot be explained through, one who cherishes himself ought to know that 「法性甚深非尋思境」 tr. “the nature of dharmas is profound and is not the object-field that pondering can reach.” Yuanhui expressly marks this a Sarvāstivādin defense. And Saṅghabhadra’s Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, reading this place, reacts with the greatest heat, adjudging the author’s sentence outright “a slanderous saying craftily set up” — meaning that this closing phrase is not one the Sarvāstivādins could have uttered of themselves but one the author fastened upon them. One and the same sentence: in this treatise the Sarvāstivādins’ defense, in Yuanhui a Sarvāstivādin defense, and in Saṅghabhadra the author’s own contrivance. The three sides see it differently, and they are recorded together without adjudication; but the reader may know from this that the attribution of that last sentence of the fascicle is itself a point at issue with a history behind it.
Through the Whole Fascicle
There are two small places in this fascicle worth returning to. One is the two blocks that are “not root stanzas” — one a stanza the author adduces in order to refute the Sarvāstivādins (「許法體恒有,而說性非常」 tr. “to grant that the entity of a dharma exists constantly and yet to say that its nature is not permanent”), and one a summary stanza gathering the sixteen dharmas and sixteen consciousnesses again (Puguang marking it 「說頌重攝。總結」 tr. “a stanza is spoken to gather it again; a general conclusion,” Fabao marking it 「此兩行頌重述前義」 tr. “these two lines of stanza restate the preceding sense”). To adjudge them not root stanzas rests upon the warrant in the preceding text and not upon guesses from doctrine; and this distinction, trivial as it looks, is the first barrier against taking another’s words for the treatise’s own.
The other is the simile at the fascicle’s close. Having glossed the word “outflow,” the author sets out a better explanation and adduces a sūtra in proof: to draw a boat against the current is hard even with great strength expended, while to let it go with the current is not hard even with strength given up — and the arising of a wholesome mind and of a defiled mind is just so. Whether the three times exist may be disputed, and the opening and gathering of the number of items may be disputed; but that going with the current is easy and going against it hard is a thing neither party will dispute. After so long a dispute within one fascicle, that it should come down at the end upon one sentence anyone may verify is no accident.
結縛纏垢·五蓋·斷惑遍知Fetters, Bonds, Entanglements, and Grime · The Five Hindrances · Abandoning the Afflictions and Full Comprehension
全文五層 →Full five layers →隨眠之體既辯,這一卷不添一法,只換六個名目重看同一批煩惱——結、縛、隨眠、隨煩惱、纏、煩惱垢;再以三斷、三性、三界、六識、五受五門分別,末立五蓋。至「今應思擇」一句,全品轉身:從『明惑之體』進入『明惑之滅』——斷惑四因、四種對治、斷從所緣、遠性四種、離繫重得,最後以九種遍知的六層機關結帳收品。
一句話:這一卷做的是兩件事——先把同一批煩惱換六把尺各量一遍,再教你怎麼替『斷』記帳;而全論最嚴的一次驗算,就發生在替九個遍知定數的那一段。
三個眼目
-
換一把尺就換一個數,而數目相等反而是要分開的理由。結、縛、纏、垢量的是同一批煩惱的不同作用,所以六門的數字不可加總。更要緊的是本卷示範了『開』與『合』各自的資格:三見與二取因為「物取等故」而分立二結——體數相等加上能所有別,正是分的理由;惛眠與掉悔因為「食、治、用同」而合為一蓋;不還與阿羅漢因為越界與得果二緣具足,其斷才有資格「總集」為一遍知。本論從不為省事而合,也從不為熱鬧而開;每一次開合都要先出示尺。
-
一個理由立完了,論主會自己拆它。嫉慳升為結,論先給「二唯不善自在起故」;隨即自陳:這在八纏之下說得通,「許有十纏此釋非理」——因為忿、覆同樣具足那兩義,於是改立『過失尤重、數現行故』並補三組理由。同樣地,四種對治先依名列出,論隨即說「若欲善說,理實應為如是次第」而改依修行實序重排。讀本論要看清一個理由的適用前提;前提一換,理由就得換。
-
斷惑不是把煩惱挖掉,是切斷它與境的路。論說得極清楚:「不可令其離相應法,但可令彼遠離所緣」——相應法拆不開,能斷的是『得』與所緣。由此才有四因之中的兩條連坐——能緣斷則所緣者隨斷、所緣斷則能緣者隨斷;也才有「非要遍知所緣故斷」這一句,把『看清楚才能斷』降為四分之一的模型。判準不在斷得徹不徹底,在它還能不能對那個境生起。
一義(附):斷五蓋要先斷它的伙食
五蓋唯在欲界,理由是純不善而上界無不善;只立五個,理由是唯此能障戒、慧、定三蘊,定慧既無便於四諦起疑,一路擋到解脫與解脫智見。真正好用的是中間那一段:惛眠與掉悔各是兩個法,卻合為一蓋,因為它們「食、治、用同」。
論把三個字逐一釋開——食是所食,也叫資糧;治是能治,也叫非食;用是事用,也叫功能。然後給出清單:惛眠蓋的食是𧄼瞢、不樂、頻申、食不平性、心昧劣性五法,非食是光明想;掉悔蓋的食是親里尋、國土尋、不死尋、隨念昔日戲笑歡娛等四法,非食是奢摩他。⇒ 對治煩惱不從煩惱本身下手,先查是什麼在餵它。 這是全卷最能直接拿去用的一段。
至於五蓋的次第該怎麼排——論主先破舊解(掉悔既障定,理應在惛眠前說),繼引一解調換配屬(惛眠障定、掉悔障慧),再引一解改用行位、住位、入定位、出定位的軸線重排。三段是一條線,不是三個並列的答案;而孰是孰非,論未判,古德亦未下判詞。
通於全論
六門之立,是把前兩卷所辨的隨眠接回全論的煩惱總表;十纏六垢的名相與其等流歸屬,後世唯識一系重編為二十隨煩惱而換了分類的尺——所遍的範圍取代了所從生的等流,而『非根本、隨心起』一義未改。
後半的惑滅一章,是賢聖品的前置:四種對治正對加行、無間、解脫、勝進四道;離繫重得的六時(治道起、得四果、練根)與九遍知的成就增減,全部要在賢聖品的位次表上兌現。這一卷等於先把帳簿格式定好,下一品才開始逐位填數。
還有一件事是這一卷留下的線頭:遠性四種一段,論主以「傳說」二字起頭,末後以「若依正理,應說去來離法自相故名為遠」收束——那一句是論主代述他家之解而非自宗,古德標得清楚卻不下判詞;同一句到了系內對辯之論那裡,則被逐字摘引而判為與正理相違。同一段文,一家選擇不判,一家選擇判違——這是本卷留給讀者的一面鏡子。
The entity of the latent tendencies having been adjudged, this fascicle adds not a single dharma; it merely changes six names and looks again at the same set of afflictions — fetter, bond, latent tendency, secondary affliction, entanglement, and grime of affliction; then it analyzes them through the five gates of the two abandonments, the three ethical qualities, the three realms, the six consciousnesses, and the five feelings, and at the end establishes the five hindrances. At the sentence “now this should be considered,” the whole chapter turns on its heel: from “explaining the entity of the afflictions” it passes into “explaining the cessation of the afflictions” — the four causes of abandoning the afflictions, the four kinds of counteragent, abandonment from the side of the object, the four kinds of distance, and the repeated obtaining of release from bondage; and it closes the chapter by settling accounts with the six-tiered mechanism of the nine full comprehensions.
In one sentence: This fascicle does two things — first it measures one and the same set of afflictions six times over with six different rules, and then it teaches you how to keep the ledger of “abandoning”; and the most exacting verification in the whole treatise occurs in the passage that fixes the number of the nine full comprehensions.
Three Points to Watch
-
Change the rule and the number changes; and when the numbers come out equal, that is precisely the reason for keeping the items apart. Fetter, bond, entanglement, and grime measure different functions of the same set of afflictions, and so the numbers of the six gates may not be added together. What matters more is that this fascicle demonstrates the qualifications for “opening out” and for “gathering together” each in its own right: the three views and the two graspings are set up as two separate fetters “because they are equal in things and equal in grasping” — an equal count of entities plus a difference between what grasps and what is grasped is exactly the reason for dividing them; torpor-and-sleep and restlessness-and-regret are gathered into one hindrance each “because their food, their counteragent, and their function are the same”; and the abandonments of the non-returner and the arhat qualify to be “gathered together” into one full comprehension only because the two conditions of crossing a realm and obtaining a fruit are both present. This treatise never gathers for convenience and never divides for show; at every joining and dividing it must first produce the rule it is measuring with.
-
Once a reason has been established, the author will take it apart himself. For raising envy and avarice to the rank of fetters the treatise first gives “because these two alone are unwholesome and arise of themselves”; and then it states of its own accord that this passes under a scheme of eight entanglements but that “if one grants that there are ten entanglements this explanation is unreasonable” — since rage and concealment equally possess those two senses; whereupon it establishes instead “their faults are especially grave, since these two occur again and again” and adds three further sets of reasons. In the same way, the four kinds of counteragent are first listed in the order of their names, and the treatise at once says “if one would speak well of it, in principle the order ought to be as follows” and rearranges them according to the real order of practice. In reading this treatise one must see clearly the premise under which a reason holds; change the premise and the reason must change with it.
-
Abandoning an affliction is not digging the affliction out; it is cutting the road between the affliction and its object. The treatise says it with the utmost clarity: “it cannot be made to leave the dharmas associated with it, but it can be made to depart from its object” — the associated dharmas cannot be pried apart, and what can be abandoned is the acquisition and the object. It is from this that two of the four causes come in pairs — abandon what takes it as object and it is abandoned along with that; abandon its object and what takes that as object is abandoned along with it; and it is from this that the sentence “it is not necessary that they be abandoned through fully comprehending their object” comes, which reduces “only by seeing clearly can one abandon” to one quarter of the model. The criterion is not how thoroughly it has been abandoned, but whether it can still arise toward that object.
One Further Point (Appended): To Abandon the Five Hindrances, First Cut Off Their Board and Keep
The five hindrances are in the desire realm alone, the reason being that they are purely unwholesome while the upper realms have nothing unwholesome; and only five are established, the reason being that these alone can obstruct the three aggregates of discipline, discernment, and concentration, and, concentration and discernment being gone, doubt arises with regard to the four truths, obstructing the way through to liberation and to the knowledge and vision of liberation. What is really serviceable is the passage in the middle: torpor-and-sleep and restlessness-and-regret are two dharmas apiece, and yet each pair is gathered into one hindrance, because they are the same in “food, counteragent, and function.”
The treatise glosses the three words one by one — food is what is eaten, also called provision; counteragent is what counteracts, also called non-food; function is the activity performed, also called capability. It then gives the list: the food of the hindrance of torpor-and-sleep is the five dharmas of murkiness, dissatisfaction, yawning and stretching, unevenness of diet, and dullness and inferiority of mind, while its non-food is the ideation of light; the food of the hindrance of restlessness-and-regret is the four dharmas of thought of kinsfolk, thought of one’s native land, thought of not dying, and recollection of former sport, mirth, and merrymaking, while its non-food is calm abiding. ⇒ To counteract an affliction one does not lay hold of the affliction itself; one first finds out what is feeding it. This is the passage in the whole fascicle that can be taken up and put to use most directly.
As for how the order of the five hindrances ought to be arranged — the author first refutes the old explanation (restlessness-and-regret obstructs concentration, and in principle ought to be spoken of before torpor-and-sleep), then adduces one explanation that exchanges the assignments (torpor-and-sleep obstructing concentration, restlessness-and-regret discernment), then adduces another explanation that rearranges them along the axis of the stage of moving about, the stage of dwelling, the stage of entering absorption, and the stage of emerging from absorption. The three passages are one continuous line and not three answers set side by side; and as to which is right and which is wrong, the treatise passes no judgment, nor do the ancient masters hand down a verdict.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The setting up of the six gates joins the latent tendencies adjudged in the two foregoing fascicles back onto the general table of the afflictions for the treatise as a whole; the names and marks of the ten entanglements and six grimes, and their assignment by homogeneous outflow, were recompiled by the later Yogācāra lineage as the twenty secondary afflictions with a changed rule of classification — the extent of what they pervade taking the place of the homogeneous stream from which they arise, while the one sense of “not a root affliction, arising along with mind” was left unchanged.
The chapter on the cessation of the afflictions in the second half is the antechamber of the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble: the four kinds of counteragent answer exactly to the four paths of preparation, of no interval, of liberation, and of distinguished progress; the six occasions of the repeated obtaining of release from bondage (the arising of the counteracting path, the obtaining of the four fruits, the sharpening of the faculties) and the increase and decrease of the possession of the nine full comprehensions must all be cashed out on the table of stages in the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble. This fascicle amounts to fixing the format of the ledger beforehand; only in the next chapter does the filling in of the figures stage by stage begin.
There is one more loose thread this fascicle leaves behind: in the passage on the four kinds of distance the author begins with the two words “it is transmitted,” and closes at the end with “if one goes by correct principle, one should say that the past and the future are called distant because they are apart from the intrinsic mark of a dharma” — that sentence is the author setting out another house’s explanation and not his own school; the ancient masters mark this plainly and yet hand down no verdict, whereas the same sentence, in the treatise of disputation within the lineage, is cited word for word and adjudged to be at variance with correct principle. One and the same passage of text: one house choosing not to judge, the other choosing to judge it at variance — this is the mirror that this fascicle leaves for the reader.
道體·四諦二諦·入修加行The Nature of the Path · The Four Truths and the Two Truths · Entering Cultivation and the Preparatory Practices
全文五層 →Full five layers →隨眠品說盡了斷,這一卷追問:斷靠什麼?——「然斷必由道力故得,此所由道其相云何?」一句起,先立道體(見道唯無漏·修道通二),次明道所證之四諦與二諦,再轉入聖道之加行(住戒·三慧·身器三因·四聖種·入修二門)。三家古德同判本品大文有三,此卷走完前二,並踏進第三之首節。
一句話:這一卷不是在講證果,是在鋪路——鋪到「不淨觀」與「持息念」兩道門為止;而路能不能鋪,全繫於中間那一場『樂受是否實有』的地基之爭。
三個眼目
-
「唯無漏」是結論,不是身分。 見道之所以唯無漏,理由寫在論裡——「見道速能治三界故」「頓斷九品見所斷故,非世間道有此堪能」。做得到,才判它是;修道做不到那樣,所以放有漏進來。凡見一法被判為唯無漏、唯有漏,先找那個逼出結論的能耐或限定。 不淨觀被判「此觀理應唯是有漏」,逼它的是「唯勝解作意相應」六字——同一手法,反向使用。
-
四諦的次第是行門的次第,不是因果的次第。 論說得明白:「隨現觀位先後而說」。若依因果,該先集後苦;依現觀,先觀最逼惱、最愛著、又是求脫之因的那一法,所以先苦。兩個譬喻把它釘死:見病、尋因、思愈、求藥;醫王四德。這一條可以直接搬到用功上——先認苦,再追因,再信其可滅,最後才問方法。
-
二諦的判準是兩道手續,不是兩種價值。 破它一次,看認知還在不在;以慧析出其餘成分,看認知還在不在。破了析了就沒有的是世俗,仍在的是勝義。要緊的是:世俗諦仍是「諦」——「依世俗理說有瓶等是實非虛」。承認一物是施設,不等於判它是妄。 這一分寸,與世品『承認一物存在不等於允許它借用鄰格的名字』是同一種分寸。
一義(附):定無實樂之諍為什麼是地基
苦諦要能成立,靠的是三苦攝盡有漏;而真正遍攝一切的是行苦——「理實一切行苦故苦,此唯聖者所能觀見」。睫毛置掌與置眼珠之喻,說的就是這一層何以凡夫不見。
於是有一部師逼上一步:既然如此,索性說「定無實樂,受唯是苦」,三經為教證、樂因不定為理證,再開治苦覺樂與苦易覺樂二章。論主在此不隨之——他明白站到有部一邊:「對法諸師言樂實有,此言應理」,先三番反徵(撥了樂,你拿什麼定義苦),再分自相與異門二層拆其救,再逐一通其三經(佛自釋通:依無常與變壞而密作是說),最後回破其理證(樂因要觀待所依分位,如火之於所煮)。
要看清的是他破的只有一條——樂全無實體;三苦攝一切有漏,一步未讓。承認有真實的樂,同時說一切有漏皆苦——這兩句並不相礙,因為它們用的是不同的一把尺(自相/行苦)。全卷讀來最要緊的一課,就在這裡。
通於全論
道體之二分(見道唯無漏·修道通二),是本品其後三卷立四念住、四善根、十六心見道、修惑九品次第斷的總坐標。四諦次第之判準(隨現觀),直接規定了下一卷加行位的觀法。二諦之判,是全論處理「假法/實法」的通用尺,界品之假地水說與此互證。三慧與四聖種,是入道前的資糧清單;入修二門則是本卷交給下一卷的接口——心由此二門而得定,「心得定已復何所修」,正是下一卷的開卷句。
還有兩個線頭留給讀者:其一,本卷有三處古來爭議的並錄——樂受實有、三慧不成之難、不喜足與大欲之訓詞;三處眾賢皆有反破,其中三慧一段他逕謂論主「未達毘婆沙意」,是全卷評語最直的一句。其二,持息念的六相(數隨止觀轉淨)在此只列其名與相,真正的昇進(轉、淨二相所指的世第一法與見道)要到下二卷才展開;這一卷只把門打開。
The Chapter on the Latent Tendencies said all it had to say about abandoning; this fascicle asks what abandoning depends upon — “yet abandoning must be obtained by the force of the path; what is the mark of this path by which it comes about?” From that one sentence it first establishes the entity of the path (the path of seeing without outflows alone · the path of cultivation extending to both), next sets out the four truths and the two truths that the path realizes, and then turns into the preparatory practices of the noble path (abiding in discipline · the three discernments · the three causes of a purified bodily vessel · the four noble lineages · the two gates for entering cultivation). The three ancient masters alike adjudge the main text of this chapter to be threefold; this fascicle walks through the first two and steps into the opening section of the third.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not treating the attaining of fruits; it is laying a road — laying it as far as the two gates of the contemplation of impurity and mindfulness that holds the breath; and whether the road can be laid at all hangs upon the dispute over foundations set in the middle of it, whether pleasant feeling really exists.
Three Points to Watch
-
“Without outflows alone” is a conclusion, not a status. The reason the path of seeing is without outflows alone is written out in the treatise — “because the path of seeing can quickly counteract the three realms,” “because it cuts off the nine grades of what is abandoned by seeing all at once, and no mundane path has such capacity.” It is because it can do this that it is so adjudged; and because the path of cultivation cannot do the like, what has outflows is let in. Whenever a dharma is adjudged to be without outflows alone, or with outflows alone, first find the capacity or the restriction that forced the conclusion out. The contemplation of impurity is adjudged “this contemplation should in principle be with outflows alone,” and what forces it is the six words “associated with attention through resolve alone” — the same move, used in the reverse direction.
-
The order of the four truths is the order of a practice-gate, not the order of cause and effect. The treatise says it plainly: “they are spoken of according to the priority and posteriority of the stages of direct realization.” By cause and effect, origin should be spoken of before suffering; by direct realization, one observes first that dharma which is most oppressive, most clung to, and is besides the reason one seeks release — hence suffering first. Two similes nail it down: seeing the sickness, seeking its cause, considering its cure, seeking the good medicine; and the four qualities of the king of physicians. This can be carried straight over into one’s own practice — first recognize the suffering, then track down its cause, then trust that it can be brought to cessation, and only last ask after the method.
-
The measure of the two truths is a pair of procedures, not a pair of values. Break the thing once, and see whether the cognition of it is still there; analyze out the remaining components with discernment, and see whether the cognition of it is still there. What is gone once broken or analyzed is conventional; what remains is ultimate. And this is what matters: the conventional truth is still a truth — “to say in dependence upon conventional principle that there is a pot and the like is real and not false.” To grant that a thing is conventionally established is not to adjudge it delusive. This nice measure is the same nice measure as the one in the Chapter on the World: that to grant a thing exists is not to permit it to borrow the name of the neighboring category.
One Further Point (Appended): Why the Dispute over the Nonexistence of Real Pleasure Is the Foundation
If the truth of suffering is to stand, it stands by the three kinds of suffering taking in everything with outflows; and what truly pervades all of them is the suffering of the formations — “in truth all formations are suffering because of suffering, and this only the noble ones are able to observe and see.” The simile of the eyelash on the palm and on the eyeball is telling just this layer, why the ordinary man does not see it.
Whereupon one school presses a step further: that being so, let it simply be said that “there is definitely no real pleasure; feeling is suffering alone,” with three sūtras for its proof from teaching and the indeterminacy of the causes of pleasure for its proof from principle, and then two further sections opened, that the sense of pleasure arises only when suffering is counteracted and only when suffering shifts. Here the author does not follow them — he stands openly on the side of the Sarvāstivādins: “the masters of Abhidharma say that pleasure really exists, and this saying is reasonable.” First he presses back in three rounds (having struck out pleasure, what will you call suffering?), then he takes their defense apart in the two layers of intrinsic mark and other gate, then explains through their three sūtras one by one (the Buddha explained it through himself: he spoke with the implicit sense of impermanence and of alterability), and last refutes their proof from principle (a cause of pleasure must be observed together with the stage of its support, as fire must be observed together with what is cooked).
What must be seen clearly is that he refutes one thing only — that pleasure has no real entity at all; on the three kinds of suffering taking in everything with outflows he has not yielded a step. To grant that there is real pleasure, and at the same time to say that everything with outflows is suffering — these two sentences do not obstruct each other, because they are using two different measuring rods (intrinsic mark / the suffering of the formations). The most important lesson to be had from reading the whole fascicle lies just here.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The twofold division of the entity of the path (the path of seeing without outflows alone · the path of cultivation extending to both) is the master coordinate for the three fascicles that follow in this chapter, where the four foundations of mindfulness, the four wholesome roots, the sixteen minds of the path of seeing, and the grade-by-grade abandoning of the nine grades of the afflictions abandoned by cultivation are established. The measure by which the order of the four truths is fixed (following direct realization) directly prescribes the manner of contemplation in the preparatory stage treated in the next fascicle. The adjudication of the two truths is the general rod by which the whole treatise handles “conventional dharma / real dharma,” and the conventional earth and water of the Chapter on the Elements evidence it in return. The three discernments and the four noble lineages are the checklist of provisions before entering the path; and the two gates for entering cultivation are the interface this fascicle hands to the next — the mind obtains concentration through these two gates, and “the mind having obtained concentration, what further is to be cultivated” is precisely the opening sentence of the next fascicle.
Two loose threads are left for the reader. First, this fascicle has three places of ancient dispute recorded together — whether pleasure really exists, the objection that the discernment formed through reflection cannot be established, and the glosses of discontent and great desire; in all three Saṅghabhadra has a refutation, and in the one on the three discernments he says outright that the author “failed to reach the sense of the Vibhāṣā,” the bluntest verdict in the fascicle. Second, the six marks of mindfulness that holds the breath (counting, following, settling, observing, turning, purifying) are here given only in name and mark; the real ascent (the highest worldly dharma and the path of seeing, at which the marks of turning and purifying point) is not opened out until two fascicles later. This fascicle only opens the gate.
四念住·四善根·見道十六心The Four Foundations of Mindfulness · The Four Wholesome Roots · The Sixteen Minds of the Path of Seeing
全文五層 →Full five layers →這一卷從「心得定已復何所修」問起,走完四念住、四善根,一躍入見道十六心,停在預流極七返。加行位之終與見道位之始,全在此一卷。三家古德在卷首把科判的刀落在同一處,所分之科逐字全同——這是本品最強的一處古德之證。
一句話:這一卷不是在排修行的名次,是在替『從觀身到見諦』的每一個剎那定分位;分位一定,什麼時候唯法念住、什麼時候只剩欲界苦一個行相、哪一個剎那還算見道,全都不必再猜。
三個眼目
-
名字裡藏著位次的判斷。煖是「能燒惑薪聖道火前相」——是火的前相,還不是火;頂取「如人頂故」與「如山頂故」二訓——最高處也就是進退兩際;忍取「無退墮故」;世第一取「此有漏故名為世間,是最勝故名為第一」——最勝者仍是有漏。四個名字合起來,說的是同一件事:這一整段仍在世間,仍會退,仍未見諦。 讀本論之名相,先問它取的是所比之物的哪一義,答案幾乎都在緊接的一句訓詞裡。
-
愈往上,所緣愈少、時間愈短。煖與頂具觀四諦、具修十六行相;忍之下中二品同頂,上品「唯觀欲苦,一行一剎那」;世第一法亦然。整個有漏加行的終點,是一個一剎那的無間之因。收束不是退步——所緣愈減,力量愈聚,才接得上下一剎那的苦法智忍。同一條理路到修道位再現一次:「下下品道勢力能斷上上品障」,粗垢先除、細垢後盡。
-
判準永遠繫於已現起者,不繫於將可有者。前十五心是見道,因為「見未曾見故」;第十六心屬修道,判準只有一條——所見之諦有沒有剩,與智之利鈍無關。住果之人不名後向,因為「未得勝果道」——不是不能前進,是此刻的名依現行之道而立。本論立名的通則就在這裡:名繫於現起,不繫於堪能。
一義(附):見道那十六個剎那
規律只有一條,走四遍:一諦之上,先緣欲界起法忍,法忍無間起法智;再總緣上二界起類忍,類忍無間起類智。四諦各四,合為十六。法智是初證,類智「以後隨前而證境故」得類之名。
忍與智的分工是「忍是無間道」「智是解脫道」——先驅賊,後閉戶。有人難:若唯忍斷惑,豈不與本論九結聚相違?論主答「諸忍皆是智眷屬故,如王眷屬所作事業名王所作」。
至於別部主張的頓現觀,論不急著判錯,先切詞義:現觀有見、緣、事三種。就見現觀說頓,不成,「以諸諦中行相別故」;就事現觀說頓,則「理亦無失」。爭點不在頓漸,在所指。 這是本論處理相違最乾淨的一次示範。
通於全論
四念住之三體(自性、相雜、所緣)是本論『一名三體』體例的樣本;順決擇分諸門(所成、地、身、男女、捨退)是諸門分別的樣本;九品失德則直接取用隨眠品所立的九品修惑之尺,本卷只說「如先已辯」而不重立。
還有兩件事是這一卷留給讀者的線頭。其一,異生性究竟由誰捨,論出正義而並錄二說,且難語與釋通語緊接而下——每一句掛回它的主人,是讀本論並錄之處的基本功。其二,本卷收在「餘位亦有極七返生,然非決定,是故不說」——這句所留的空缺,正是下一卷斷修惑、立一來不還的起處。
This fascicle begins from the question “the mind having gained concentration, what further is to be cultivated?”, walks the whole length of the four foundations of mindfulness and the four wholesome roots, leaps at a bound into the sixteen minds of the path of seeing, and comes to rest upon the stream-enterer who returns at most seven times. The end of the stage of preparatory practice and the beginning of the path of seeing are both of them within this one fascicle. At the head of the fascicle the three houses of ancient masters let the knife of the outline fall in one and the same place, and the divisions they make agree word for word — this is the strongest single witness of the ancient masters anywhere in this chapter.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not ranking the stages of practice in order of dignity; it is fixing the station of every single moment along the way ‘from observing the body to seeing the truths’ — the stations once fixed, one need never again guess when there is only the foundation of mindfulness directed to dharmas, when there is left but the single mode of apprehension of the suffering of the desire realm, and which moment still counts as the path of seeing.
Three Points to Watch
-
Hidden within the names is the adjudication of the stations. Heat is “the forerunner of the fire of the noble path, which can burn the firewood of the afflictions” — the forerunner of the fire, and not yet the fire. Summit takes two glosses, “as with the crown of a man” and “as with the summit of a mountain” — the highest place is also the very brink between advance and retreat. Receptivity takes “since there is no falling back.” The highest worldly dharma takes “since this is with outflows it is called worldly, and since it is the most excellent it is called highest” — and the most excellent is still with outflows. The four names taken together say one and the same thing: this whole stretch is still worldly, still liable to retreat, and has not yet seen the truths. In reading the technical terms of this treatise, first ask which sense of the thing compared has been taken; the answer is almost always in the sentence of gloss that immediately follows.
-
The higher one goes, the fewer the objects and the shorter the time. Heat and summit observe the four truths in full and cultivate the sixteen modes of apprehension in full; the low and middling grades of receptivity are the same as summit, while its highest grade “observes only the suffering of the desire realm, in one mode of apprehension and one moment,” and the highest worldly dharma likewise. The terminus of the whole preparatory practice with outflows is a cause, one moment long, with nothing intervening after it. This gathering-in is no step backwards — the fewer the objects, the more the strength is massed, and only so can it join to the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering in the next moment. The same line of reasoning appears once more at the path of cultivation: “the path of the lowest of the low grades has the force to cut off the obstruction of the highest of the high grades,” the coarse grime removed first and the fine grime exhausted afterwards.
-
The measure is always fastened to what has already arisen, never to what may yet be had. The first fifteen minds are the path of seeing “because what is seen has not been seen before”; the sixteenth mind belongs to the path of cultivation, and the measure is a single one — whether any truth is left unseen, and it has nothing to do with whether the faculties are dull or keen. One who abides in a fruit is not called an approacher to the next, because he “has not yet obtained the path of the higher fruit” — not that he cannot go forward, but that the name at this moment is established upon the path actually in course. Here lies the general rule by which this treatise establishes names: the name is fastened to what has arisen, not to what is possible.
One Further Point (Appended): Those Sixteen Moments of the Path of Seeing
There is but one rule, and it is walked four times over: upon one truth, first, taking the desire realm as object, receptivity to the cognition of dharma arises, and with nothing intervening after the receptivity there arises the cognition of dharma; then, taking the two higher realms together as object, subsequent receptivity arises, and with nothing intervening after it the subsequent cognition. Four to each of the four truths, sixteen in all. The cognition of dharma is the first realization; the subsequent cognition gets the name “subsequent” “because it realizes its object following after the former.”
The division of labor between receptivity and cognition is that “receptivity is the uninterrupted path” and “cognition is the path of liberation” — first the thief is driven out, then the door is shut. Someone objects: if the afflictions are cut off by receptivity alone, does this not contradict the nine clusters of fetters in the treatise itself? The author answers, “because all the receptivities are the retinue of cognition, as the business done by a king’s retinue is called the doing of the king.”
As for the simultaneous direct realization maintained by another school, the treatise is in no haste to pronounce it wrong; it first divides the sense of the word: direct realization is of three kinds, that of seeing, that of taking as object, and that of the matter done. Said of the direct realization that is seeing, simultaneity does not stand, “since the modes of apprehension differ among the truths”; said of the direct realization that is the matter done, then “in principle there is no fault either.” The point at issue is not simultaneity or gradualness, but what is being referred to. This is the cleanest demonstration in the treatise of how a contradiction is to be handled.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The three entities of a foundation of mindfulness (intrinsic nature, conjoined, and object) are the model of this treatise’s form of ‘one name with three entities’; the several gates of the factors conducive to penetration (what they are formed by, level, body, male and female, relinquishing and retreat) are the model of analysis through the several gates; while the nine grades of fault and virtue take over directly the measure of the nine grades of afflictions to be abandoned by cultivation established in the Chapter on the Latent Tendencies, this fascicle saying only “as was already analyzed before” and not establishing it afresh.
Two loose threads besides are left by this fascicle to its reader. First, by what exactly ordinary-being status is relinquished: the treatise gives its own correct sense and yet records two further accounts alongside, with the objection and the sentence that explains it through following hard upon each other — to hang every sentence back upon its own master is the basic exercise of reading this treatise where accounts are recorded side by side. Second, this fascicle closes on “those in the other stations also have at most seven returning births, yet not with certainty, and so it is not spoken of” — the blank left by that sentence is precisely where the next fascicle begins, in cutting off the afflictions abandoned by cultivation and establishing the once-returner and the non-returner.
四向四果·沙門性The Four Approaches and Four Fruits · The Nature of the Ascetic Life
全文五層 →Full five layers →預流住果既訖,論主一句「今次應辯斷位眾聖」轉身講斷位。自下而上:家家三緣、一來果、一間、不還果;不還之七種開為九種、合為七善士趣;經生聖者不往餘界不練根不退;雜修靜慮成五品而感五淨居,得滅定者轉名身證;再上是阿羅漢向、金剛喻定、盡智;中夾離染道、離繫得、近分解脫、世道行相一段傍論;末立沙門性一章,出八十九果體、五因立四果、婆羅門與梵輪法輪、依何界得。二十二頌,一根刻度尺,一把尺子本身。
一句話:這一卷把修行從斷第三品惑一路刻到斷有頂第九品惑,每一格都給一個名字——而到最後才告訴你,這些名字全都掛在同一件東西上:無漏道。
位置(先立)
本卷之界是本品最強的一道卷界之一:論文開卷即以「已辯……今次應辯」雙套語承前啟後,而三家古德在此各自分卷,界線與玄奘全合,且所標的序號逐一相同——光記、寶疏、頌疏都判為「第二明一來向、果」。本卷所轄是本品大文第三「約聖道辨人」之中段。神泰疏在此完全缺席:其殘本現存七卷之中屬本品的只有一卷,而那一卷所釋是下一卷,本卷無泰疏可繫,據實標闕。真諦舊譯此品題作「分別聖道果人品」,全品分三卷而玄奘分四卷,本卷所對之段橫跨其兩卷之界。
三個眼目
-
劃線的不是惑的品數,是界的邊。欲界九品修惑分出兩個果、兩個向,上二界七十二品卻只成一向一果——位次的密疏不隨惑之多寡。論自己把這條理由說得很明白:一品惑不能障得一來果,因為它不越界;而第九品能障不還果,「由彼若斷便越界故」。同一句「一品惑」在第六品上與第九品上判然兩義。整卷的刻度尺就架在這一條上:凡跨界處必立位,界內再細也不另立。所以讀本卷遇到『為什麼這裡不立一個名』,先問那一步跨過界沒有。
-
同一組法,換一個分母就換一個數。不還者總說有七(五種行色界+行無色一類+現般涅槃);就業惑根細分,行色界的五種開成九(三種各分三,依速、非速、經久);就『唯行善不行惡、往而不還』立名,九又合成七善士趣。七、九、七三個數並存而不相礙,因為分母各異。細分還可以推到極處——就處、種性、離染、根四門合建,一種不還就有二千五百九十二,五種合計一萬二千九百六十。論說這一段的緣起是「麁相如是,若細分析數成多千」,意思正是:位次可以無限細分,而修證之實不在數上。凡遇法數對不上,先問『這個數是用來作什麼的』。
-
並錄與立駁,論主用的是兩隻手。五淨居唯五之由,論錄了「有餘師言:由信等五」而不加一詞;中般兼無餘依之說,論錄了立刻判「此不應理」;有行無行之別在緣有為無為聖道之說,論錄了立刻判「此說非理,太過失故」。判與不判,標誌很清楚——看有沒有那一句「非理」「不應理」。讀本卷若不先分清這兩隻手,就會把論主明明駁掉的說法當成他自己的主張,也會把他刻意兩存的地方讀成有定論。
一義(附):金剛喻定那一句限定
斷有頂第九品惑的無間道名金剛喻定,理由是「一切隨眠皆能破故、先已破故」。論隨即補一句最要緊的限定:「不破一切實有,能破一切功能。」——不是說它在那一剎那把一切惑都破盡了(前面的惑早已一品一品破過),是說它具備能破一切的功能。這一句若略過,前面全卷的次第斷惑就全被推翻了。
譬喻永遠有其所取之分。金剛所取的是「能破」,不是「已破」。這一條到卷末講法輪五相時再次兌現:輪所取的是速疾、捨取、降伏、迴轉四種用;而另一家取的是輻、轂、輞三種體。同一個喻,一取其用、一取其體,頌文以一個「或」字把兩說都收下——取分不同,兩說可以並立。
通於全卷
本卷最後一章值得回頭再讀。前面二十多節都在數格子,到「前說四果是誰果耶」一問,論才把尺子本身交出來:「諸無漏道是沙門性,懷此道者名曰沙門,以能勤勞息煩惱故。」四果不是四種身分,是無漏道上的四個位次;而無漏道就是那一件能勤勞息滅煩惱的東西。八十九個果體,說穿了只是八十九個解脫道與相應的擇滅——無間道在斷,解脫道在證,一斷一證,性與果就這樣分開又合上。
最後一問是「何沙門果依何界得」。答案是前三果只能在欲界得,因為見道只在欲界——上界無正聞、不緣下地、無苦受故不生厭。三個理由順著讀是欠缺,逆著讀就是條件:要見道,得能聞、能緣下、能厭。
於是這根刻度尺有了一個出口。滿卷的位次、生數、品數、行相數,量的都是斷到哪裡;而末後這一句所指的,是那三樣使人能夠開始斷的東西——它們不在上界的定樂裡,就在此處的苦與聞之中。
The stream-enterer settled in his fruit, the author turns upon a single sentence — “now it must next be made out who among the noble ones stand in the stage of abandoning” — and takes up that stage. From below upward: the three conditions of family-to-family, the fruit of once-returning, one-interval, the fruit of non-returning; the seven kinds of non-returner opened out into nine and gathered into the seven destinies of good men; the noble ones who have undergone birth, who go to no other realm, sharpen no faculties, and fall back not at all; the mixed cultivation of the meditative absorptions completed in five grades and drawing the five Pure Abodes, and one who obtains the absorption of cessation renamed the bodily witness; higher still, the approach to arhatship, the vajra-like concentration, the knowledge of exhaustion; with an incidental discussion set in between upon the path that frees from defilement, the acquisitions of release from bondage, liberation at the neighboring stage, and the modes of apprehension of the mundane path; and at the end a chapter establishing the nature of the ascetic life — bringing out the eighty-nine entities of the fruit, the five causes by which four fruits are established, the brahmin and the wheel of Brahmā and the wheel of Dharma, and in dependence upon which realm each is obtained. Twenty-two stanzas: one graduated scale, and the ruler itself.
In one sentence: This fascicle graduates practice from the abandoning of the third grade of defilement all the way to the abandoning of the ninth grade at the summit of existence, and gives every notch a name — and only at the very end does it tell you that all those names hang upon one and the same thing: the path without outflows.
Placement (established first)
The boundary of this fascicle is among the strongest fascicle-boundaries in the chapter: the treatise opens with the paired formula “it has already been made out . . . now it must next be made out,” carrying over what precedes and opening what follows, while the three ancient masters each divide their fascicles here, their boundary agreeing throughout with Xuanzang’s and the ordinal they mark being one and the same — Puguang, Fabao, and Yuanhui all adjudge it “the second, explaining the approach to and the fruit of once-returning.” What this fascicle governs is the middle stretch of the third main division of the chapter, “analyzing persons with respect to the noble path.” Shentai’s commentary is wholly absent here: of the seven fascicles surviving in his fragmentary text only one belongs to this chapter, and that one expounds the following fascicle, so that this fascicle has no Shentai to hang upon, and the want is marked as it stands. Paramārtha’s earlier translation titles this chapter “Analysis of the Persons of the Path and Fruit of the Noble Ones,” dividing the whole chapter into three fascicles where Xuanzang divides it into four, so that the passage matched to this fascicle straddles the boundary of two of his.
Three Points to Watch
-
What draws the line is not the number of grades of defilement but the edge of a realm. The nine grades of defilement abandoned by cultivation in the desire realm yield two fruits and two approaches, while the seventy-two grades of the two upper realms yield only one approach and one fruit — the density of the notches does not follow the quantity of the defilements. The treatise itself states the reason plainly: one grade of defilement cannot obstruct the obtaining of the fruit of once-returning, because it does not cross a realm; whereas the ninth grade can obstruct the fruit of non-returning, “because when it is abandoned one thereupon crosses out of the realm.” One and the same phrase, “one grade of defilement,” means two flatly different things at the sixth grade and at the ninth. The whole fascicle’s graduated scale is built upon this one point: wherever a realm is crossed a stage must be established, and however fine the divisions within a realm no further stage is set up. So when, in reading this fascicle, you meet “why is no stage established here?”, first ask whether that step crosses a realm.
-
One and the same set of dharmas takes a new number whenever the denominator is changed. The non-returner is said in sum to be of seven kinds (five that proceed to the form realm, the four that proceed to the formless taken as one class, and attaining parinirvāṇa in the present life); reckoned finely by action, defilement, and faculty, the five that proceed to the form realm open into nine (three kinds each divided into three, according to swift, not swift, and long in coming); and named by “doing only what is good and not what is evil, going and not returning,” the nine gather back into the seven destinies of good men. Seven, nine, and seven stand together without obstructing one another, because their denominators differ. The dividing can be pressed to the extreme — reckoned by the four gates of place, lineage, freedom from defilement, and faculty, one kind of non-returner comes to two thousand five hundred ninety-two, and the five kinds together to twelve thousand nine hundred sixty. The treatise gives the occasion of the passage as “such is the coarse aspect; analyzed finely, the number comes to many thousands,” and what it means is just this: the stages can be divided without end, and yet the reality of realization does not lie in the numbers. Whenever the numbers of a set of dharmas will not agree, first ask what this particular number was made for.
-
In recording and in refuting, the author uses two different hands. As to why the Pure Abodes are only five, the treatise records “some other masters say: by the five, confidence and the rest,” and adds not a word; as to the account that attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval extends also to the nirvāṇa without remainder, the treatise records it and at once adjudges “this is unreasonable”; as to the account that the difference between attaining parinirvāṇa with exertion and without lies in taking the conditioned or the unconditioned noble path as object, the treatise records it and at once adjudges “this account is unreasonable, for the fault is too sweeping.” Judging and not judging are marked quite clearly — look for the sentence “unreasonable,” “this is not reasonable”. If in reading this fascicle you do not first tell the two hands apart, you will take for the author’s own position an account he has plainly refuted, and you will read as settled the places where he has deliberately let two accounts stand.
One Further Point (Appended): That One Qualifier on the Vajra-like Concentration
The uninterrupted path that abandons the ninth grade of defilement at the summit of existence is named the vajra-like concentration, on the ground that “it is able to break every latent tendency, and has already broken them before.” The treatise adds at once the one qualifier that matters most: “it does not break every really existent thing; it is able to break every capability.” — It is not that in that single moment it broke every defilement at once (the earlier defilements had long since been broken one grade at a time); it is that it possesses the capability of breaking every one of them. Let this sentence slip, and the whole graduated abandoning of the foregoing fascicle is overturned.
A simile always has its own portion that is taken. What is taken of the vajra is “able to break,” not “has broken.” The point is honored again at the end of the fascicle, in the five marks of the wheel of Dharma: what is taken of the wheel there is its four functions — swift proceeding, letting go and taking up, subduing, and turning about; while another master takes its three parts — the spokes, the hub, and the rim. One and the same simile, one taking its function and one its body, and the stanza takes both accounts in with a single word “or” — the portion taken differing, the two accounts may stand together.
Through the whole fascicle
The last chapter of this fascicle is worth going back and reading again. The twenty-odd sections before it have all been counting off notches; and only at the question “the four fruits spoken of above — whose fruits are they?” does the treatise hand over the ruler itself: “the paths without outflows are the nature of the ascetic life; one who bears this path is called an ascetic, because he is able to strive and to still the defilements.” The four fruits are not four social conditions; they are four stages upon the path without outflows — and the path without outflows is just that thing which strives and stills the defilements. The eighty-nine entities of the fruit, said plainly, are no more than eighty-nine paths of liberation together with their corresponding cessations through discernment — the uninterrupted path abandoning, the path of liberation realizing; one abandonment and one realization, and thus the nature and the fruit are parted and joined again.
The last question is “which fruit of the ascetic life is obtained in dependence upon which realm.” The answer is that the first three fruits can be obtained in the desire realm alone, because the path of seeing is in the desire realm alone — in the upper realms there is no right hearing, no taking a lower level as object, and no suffering feeling and therefore no disgust. Read forward, the three reasons are lacks; read backward, they are the conditions: to see the path one must be able to hear, able to take what is below as object, and able to be disgusted.
And so this graduated scale is given an exit. All the fascicle’s stages, numbers of births, grades, and counts of modes of apprehension measure only how far one has abandoned; while what that last sentence points at is the three things that make it possible to begin abandoning at all — and they are not in the pleasure of absorption of the upper realms, but here, in this world’s suffering and hearing.
六種種性·七聖·菩提分法The Six Kinds of Lineage · The Seven Noble Persons · The Factors of Awakening
全文五層 →Full five layers →上一卷把四向四果講到阿羅漢為止,這一卷承著「不動應果初盡智後起無生智」一句轉身,問一件出人意表的事:諸阿羅漢彼此還有沒有差別。答有——六種種性、時解脫與不時解脫、先有與後得、退與不退、練根、九種無學、七種聖者、學無學之滿;末段另開一科,四道、四通行、三十七菩提分法、四證淨、正解脫正智、三界、厭離四句,全品於此收束。
一句話:阿羅漢所斷的煩惱是同一分,所異的只是根性與資具——這一卷不排高下,只排差別。
位置(先立)
本卷之界是全品最強的一道科界:卷界、玄奘自分之卷、三家古德的大科界三者重合,而且三家所標的序號逐字相同,都作『第五明六種種姓』。卷內另有三道次級科界——明七種聖人、明學無學滿、以及自「廣說諸道差別無量」另開的一大科。本卷還是全書第一個四家俱在的單元:神泰疏現存七卷之中唯卷十七屬賢聖品,而它恰好整幅覆蓋本卷,並留下一條獨立的頌數證據(自標七行半頌)。真諦舊譯此段場景與玄奘逐段相合,是已勘諸卷中最工整的一段。
三個眼目
-
差別不在斷惑,在根與定。六種種性由根之利鈍與二種加行的有無而分,九種無學由九品根而分,七種聖者由加行、根、滅定、解脫四門而開,學無學之滿由根、果、定三者的組合而判,四通行之樂苦由所依之地、遲速由根之利鈍而定。同一個變項組反覆使用五次。所以本卷雖然名相繁多,骨架其實只有兩根——根性與定力。讀時凡遇一組新的法數,先問它是依哪一門分的,數目自然安頓。
-
名多而事少。三十七菩提分法的實體只有十個,七種聖者的實事只有六個,斷離滅三界只是同一個無為解脫的三分。本卷三次示範同一種立名之法:隨增上的一分立名(四念住之名慧、四正斷之名勤、四神足之名定)、隨位次立名(見道名隨信行、修道名信解、無學名時解脫)、隨所對治立名(離就貪說、斷就餘結說、滅就隨眠之事說)。凡讀阿毘達磨的法數,先問這是名還是事——名可以隨門而立,事只有那麼多。
-
一場往復,四家並存。本卷最長的一段長行不講法數,講阿羅漢果究竟有退無退:論主錄經部之說而下「彼說應理」四字,古德一致標為論主的明白表態;然而廣諍既訖,論仍以「毘婆沙師定作是說:阿羅漢果亦有退義」結歸本宗。系內對辯之中另有上座與分別論師二家,同主無退而理路各異,眾賢逐一破之而歸有部。四家並存,各有其據——讀這一段的訣竅是隨時問一句『現在說話的是誰』,而不是急著替古人選邊。
一義(附):所退的究竟是什麼
這場諍論真正的樞紐,是一個看似瑣碎的分辨——所退的是果體,是定,還是現前受用。經部的答法不是否認經證,而是先問一句『退的是哪一分』:時愛解脫所退的是根本靜慮的等持,不是無漏的果性;喬底迦所退的是學位上的定味,不是阿羅漢果;炭喻經所說的失念生覺,是在他未善通達之前的學位事。論又把『退』字自身分成已得、未得、受用三種,於是連世尊也有一種受用退——只因功德太多不能一時全部現前。字一分細,矛盾就化開了。
通於全卷
全品收束於厭與離的四句:厭唯緣苦集,離則通緣四諦而以能斷惑為準;二者寬窄互有出入,故成四句。這個收法很像本卷通篇的縮影——兩個判準各自立清楚,交錯之處自然成表,不必判誰勝誰劣。
而四句所用的忍與智,正是下一品要專門處理的東西。本卷最後一句說先離欲染而後見諦的人,其加行、解脫、勝進三道所攝的忍智都不令惑斷,因為惑已斷、非斷治——說到這裡,讀者的目光已經被引到智門上去了。
The preceding fascicle carried the four approaches and four fruits as far as the arhat; this fascicle turns upon the one sentence “an arhat of the unshakable lineage, after the first knowledge of exhaustion, gives rise to the knowledge of non-arising,” and asks something one would not have expected: whether arhats still differ among themselves. They do — six kinds of lineage; liberation dependent on circumstance and liberation not dependent on it; the lineage had from the first and the lineage got afterward; falling back and not falling back; the refining of the faculties; the nine kinds of those beyond training; the seven noble persons; the fullness of the one in training and of the one beyond training. Then the closing passage opens a division of its own — the four paths, the four modes of penetrating progress, the thirty-seven factors of awakening, the four purities of realization, right liberation and right knowledge, the three elements, and the four alternatives of disgust and dispassion — and here the whole chapter is brought to its close.
In one sentence: The afflictions an arhat has cut off are one and the same portion; what differs is only the faculties and the supports — this fascicle does not rank them high and low, it only sets out how they differ.
Placement (established first)
The boundary of this fascicle is the strongest outline boundary in the whole chapter: the fascicle boundary, Xuanzang’s own division into fascicles, and the main outline boundary of the three ancient commentators all fall together, and the numbering the three of them mark is word for word the same, all reading “the fifth, explaining the six kinds of lineage.” Within the fascicle there are three further second-level outline boundaries — explaining the seven kinds of noble person, explaining the fullness of the one in training and the one beyond training, and the great division opened from “the differences among the paths, spoken of at large, are measureless.” This fascicle is besides the first unit in the whole book for which all four houses are present: of the seven fascicles of Shentai’s commentary that survive, only Fascicle Seventeen belongs to the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble, and it happens to cover this fascicle entire, and it leaves an independent piece of evidence for the stanza count (marking of itself seven and a half lines of stanza). Paramārtha’s earlier translation agrees passage by passage with Xuanzang over this stretch of text, and is the most evenly matched of all the fascicles yet collated.
Three Points to Watch
-
The difference does not lie in the cutting off of confusion but in the faculties and in absorption. The six kinds of lineage are divided by the keenness or dullness of the faculties and by the presence or absence of two kinds of preparation; the nine kinds of those beyond training are divided by the nine grades of faculty; the seven kinds of noble person are opened out by four gates — preparation, faculty, the absorption of cessation, and liberation; the fullness of the one in training and the one beyond training is adjudged by the combination of three things, faculty, fruit, and absorption; and among the four modes of penetrating progress the pleasant and the painful are settled by the level upon which one depends, and the slow and the swift by the keenness or dullness of the faculties. One and the same set of variables is used over and over, five times. So although this fascicle bristles with names, its frame really has only two beams — the faculties one is born with, and the force of absorption. In reading, whenever a new set of numbered dharmas appears, first ask by which gate it has been divided, and the numbers will settle themselves.
-
The names are many and the entities few. The entities of the thirty-seven factors of awakening are only ten; the real items among the seven kinds of noble person are only six; and the three elements of abandoning, dispassion, and cessation are only three portions of one unconditioned liberation. Three times over, this fascicle demonstrates one and the same way of establishing a name: by the one portion that predominates (the four foundations of mindfulness named for discernment, the four right abandonings named for diligence, the four bases of supernormal power named for absorption); by the stage in the sequence (on the path of seeing, one who follows through faith; on the path of cultivation, one resolute through faith; beyond training, liberation dependent on circumstance); and by what is counteracted (dispassion said with regard to craving, abandoning said with regard to the remaining fetters, cessation said with regard to the things in which the latent tendencies increase by attachment). Whenever one reads the numbered dharmas of Abhidharma, first ask whether this is a name or an entity — names may be established gate by gate, but of entities there are only so many.
-
One long exchange, with four houses standing together. The longest single stretch of prose in this fascicle is not about numbered dharmas at all but about whether the fruit of the arhat can in the end be fallen back from: the author records the account of the Sautrāntikas and sets down the four words “what they say accords with principle,” which the ancient commentators unanimously mark as the author’s open declaration of where he stands; and yet, the wide dispute once finished, the treatise still concludes by returning to its own school with “the Vaibhāṣika masters state it as settled: the fruit of the arhat too admits of falling back.” Within the debate inside the lineage there are two further houses, the Elder and the Masters of Distinction, who likewise maintain that there is no falling back but along unlike lines of reasoning, and whom Saṅghabhadra refutes one by one and so returns to the Sarvāstivādins. Four houses stand together, each with its own grounds — and the knack of reading this stretch is to keep asking, “who is speaking now?”, rather than hurrying to take a side for the ancients.
One Further Point (Appended): What It Is That Is Fallen Back From
The true pivot of this dispute is a distinction that looks like a triviality — is what is fallen back from the entity of the fruit, or absorption, or the present enjoyment of it? The Sautrāntika answer is not to deny the scriptural testimony but first to ask, “which portion is it that is fallen back from?” What is fallen back from in the liberation that is cherished and dependent on circumstance is the concentration of the fundamental meditative absorptions, not the fruit-nature without outflows; what Godhika fell back from was the savor of absorption at the stage of training, not the fruit of the arhat; and the losing of mindfulness and the arising of thoughts spoken of in the Sūtra of the Simile of the Charcoal are an affair of the stage of training, before he had penetrated it well. The treatise then divides the word “falling back” itself into three — from what has been obtained, from what has not been obtained, and from present enjoyment — whereupon even the World-Honored One has a falling back of one kind, that of enjoyment, and only because his merits are too many to be brought forward all at once. Divide the word finely enough, and the contradiction dissolves.
Through the whole fascicle
The whole chapter closes with the four alternatives of disgust and dispassion: disgust takes only suffering and origin as its object, whereas dispassion extends to all four truths and is measured by the ability to cut off confusion; the two are wider and narrower than one another at different points, and so they make four alternatives. This way of closing is much like a miniature of the whole fascicle — each of two criteria is established clearly on its own, and where they cross a table forms of itself, with no need to adjudge which is the better.
And the receptivities and knowledges that the four alternatives employ are exactly what the next chapter will take up as its own subject. The last sentence of this fascicle says of one who becomes free of the defilement of desire first and sees the truths afterward that among the receptivities and knowledges he has, those comprised in the path of preparation, the path of liberation, and the path of further advance do not cause confusion to be cut off, because the confusion has already been cut off and because they are not the counteragent that cuts off — and by the time this is said, the reader’s eye has already been drawn away to the gate of knowledge.
十智·行相·諸門分別The Ten Knowledges · Modes of Apprehension · Distinctions through the Several Gates
全文五層 →Full five layers →賢聖品把聖位的階梯走完了,這一卷回頭問:走這條路所憑的那個心是什麼?——從「為有忍非智耶?為有智非見耶」一問起,先劃忍·智·見三者的界,次立十智之體系(二三十之開合·他心智三限·七緣立十),次辨十智之行相(十六行相之名實·淨無越十六之諍),末以二十來門逐門分別,直到「修有四種」為止。三家古德同判本品大文有二,這一卷走完前一門之全。
一句話:這一卷不是在數智有幾種,是在反覆做同一件事——判一個名目值不值得獨立;開頭問忍該不該算智,結尾問防觀該不該別立為修,中間二十來門,問的都是這一句。
三個眼目
-
名相的意義由邊界給,不由定義給。 論不先說智是什麼,先問忍是不是智、盡無生是不是見。忍非智,因為它自所斷之疑未斷——決斷之所以叫決斷,前提是那件待決的事已經了結;盡無生非見,因為求心已息、不再推度。同一個聖慧,換一個時分就換一個名字。凡見兩個名相前後相接,先問它們是不是同一件事的兩個時分。
-
同一堆法,換一把尺就換一個數目。 十智收成二(漏與無漏)、開成三(世俗法類)、再開成十,不是三種並列的分類,是同一組法的三層粗細;而立十的理由有七條,各條所針對的不同——苦集二智因境無別只能從行相分,滅道二智則行相與境俱別,所以另立一條。論不肯用一條理由統包十個名目。 這也是相攝表要緊的原因:十個名目彼此重疊,體其實不足十。
-
帳目底下都有規則,規則抽出來,清單就變成推導。 後半三千字的『諸位修智』看似數字如麻,實則只由幾條反覆組合——治有頂處不修世俗、能斷障之道不修他心、未離欲不得他心、鈍根除無生、無記不名為修、順決擇分不修他心。論末一句「皆如理應思」,正是把沒列出的格子交還讀者。遇到本論的數目表,先找推導線;記不住,就是線沒找到。
一義(附):孤例不成證
無漏行相能不能越出十六,是本卷最密的一諍。外國師的證據是本論的一句話——說不繫心了別欲界繫法時,列了八行相而綴以「有是處、有是事」,他便以這兩句為十六之外別有的行相。
論主不從理上爭,改從文例上核:如果那部論是依這個意思說的,同一部論在說見所斷心了別欲界繫法時,也該綴上同樣的話;然而那一段列了二十一項而沒有這兩句。⇒ 同一部書的同型句式,此處有而彼處無,可見這兩句不是行相的名目。
要看清論主所否的只是這一條文證,不是宣告十六之外絕無別相;頌文所立的則是迦濕彌羅一家之宗。二造並錄,取捨屬義理之判。而那個方法可以直接借走:引一句話作證之前,先看同一部書的同型句子有沒有同樣的說法。
通於全論
忍與智之分(無間道在斷、解脫道已斷),是全論一切「無間/解脫」對舉之處的通用讀法。法智類智以欲界/上界分立,是本卷後半互緣、緣境、諸位修三大段帳目的基準線;十六行相的三重訓釋,是全論處理『一名多義門』的樣本;而『慧通行相、能行、所行』之三門寬狹,是本論體、用、境三分的標準模型。
兩處接口要記住:現觀邊俗智只在苦、集、滅三類智時兼修,這三個時點落在賢聖品的見道十六心上,兩表須合看;雜修靜慮在此只入修智之帳,其果(五淨居之因)要到定品才展開——這一卷只立其數,不立其果。
還有一個線頭留給讀者。見道中所修的那個現觀邊俗智是不生之法,永無現起之時;既不能起,「得」又依什麼而立?論引古師之解答之——由聖道力修此俗智,出觀後有勝緣諦俗智現前,得其所依故名得此,如得金礦名為得金。得到礦不等於手上有金,但礦是金之所依。修行上許多『已得而未用』的功德,都在這個譬喻底下。
The Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble walked the stairway of the noble stages to its end; this fascicle turns back and asks what that mind is upon which one walks that road. Beginning from the single question “is there anything that is receptivity and not knowledge? is there anything that is knowledge and not view?”, it first draws the boundary lines among the three, receptivity, knowledge, and view; next it establishes the system of the ten knowledges (the opening out and gathering in of two, three, and ten · the three limits upon the knowledge of others’ minds · the seven grounds on which the ten are established); next it makes out the modes of apprehension of the ten knowledges (the names and the entities of the sixteen modes · the dispute over whether the pure exceeds the sixteen); and at the last it analyzes them through some twenty gates, one gate at a time, as far as “cultivation is of four kinds.” The three ancient masters alike adjudge the main text of this chapter to divide in two, and this fascicle walks the whole of the first of those two divisions.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not counting how many kinds of knowledge there are; it is doing one and the same thing over and over — adjudging whether a name deserves to stand on its own. It opens by asking whether receptivity ought to count as knowledge, and closes by asking whether guarding and contemplating ought to be established separately as kinds of cultivation; and the twenty-odd gates in between are all asking that one question.
Three Points to Watch
-
The sense of a technical term is given by its boundaries, not by its definition. The treatise does not first say what knowledge is; it first asks whether receptivity is knowledge, and whether the knowledge of exhaustion and of non-arising are view. Receptivity is not knowledge because the doubt it is to sever has not yet been severed — what makes a decision a decision is that the matter to be decided is already settled; the knowledge of exhaustion and of non-arising are not view because the seeking mind has come to rest and no longer weighs and considers. One and the same noble discernment changes its name when the time-phase changes. Wherever two technical terms stand next to each other, ask first whether they are two time-phases of one and the same thing.
-
One and the same set of dharmas takes a different number when a different measure is laid against it. The ten knowledges gathered into two (with outflows and without outflows), opened into three (conventional, dharma, subsequent), then opened again into ten — these are not three coordinate classifications but three degrees of fineness upon one and the same set of dharmas; and the grounds on which the ten are established are seven, each aimed at something different — the knowledges of suffering and of origination, since their objects have no difference, can be divided only by mode of apprehension, whereas the knowledges of cessation and of the path differ in mode of apprehension and in object alike, and so take a ground of their own. The treatise refuses to cover ten names with a single reason. This is also why the table of mutual inclusion matters: the ten names overlap one another, and the entities are in fact fewer than ten.
-
Beneath every ledger there are rules; draw the rules out and the list turns into a derivation. The three thousand characters on “the cultivation of the knowledges at the several stages” in the second half look like a thicket of numbers, and are in fact only a few rules combined again and again — where the summit of existence is counteracted the conventional is not cultivated; a path able to sever obstruction does not cultivate the knowledge of others’ minds; one not yet free of desire does not obtain the knowledge of others’ minds; the dull of faculty leave out the knowledge of non-arising; the indeterminate is not called cultivation; the factors conducive to penetration do not cultivate the knowledge of others’ minds. The closing sentence of the fascicle, “all this should be pondered as is fitting,” is precisely the handing back to the reader of the cells that were not set out. Meeting a table of numbers in this treatise, look first for the line of derivation; if you cannot remember it, it is the line you have not found.
One Further Point (Appended): A Solitary Instance Proves Nothing
Whether modes of apprehension without outflows can exceed the sixteen is the densest dispute of this fascicle. The evidence of the masters abroad is one sentence of the treatise itself — where it speaks of an unaffiliated mind discerning dharmas affiliated to the desire realm, it lists eight modes of apprehension and then appends “there is such a case, there is such a fact,” and from those two phrases they take it that there are further modes of apprehension outside the sixteen.
The author does not contend on grounds of principle; he checks instead against the usage of the text: if that treatise were speaking with this sense in view, then the same treatise, where it speaks of a mind abandoned through seeing discerning dharmas affiliated to the desire realm, ought to append the same words; yet that passage lists twenty-one items and does not have the two phrases. ⇒ Where one and the same book has a formula of the same type here and lacks it there, it is evident that these two phrases are not names of modes of apprehension.
It must be seen clearly that what the author denies is only this one textual proof, not a declaration that there is absolutely no further mode outside the sixteen; while what the stanza establishes is the tenet of the one house of Kaśmīra. Both parties are recorded together, and the choice between them belongs to the adjudication of doctrine. And the method may be borrowed away directly: before citing a sentence as proof, look whether the sentences of the same type in that same book say the same thing.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The division between receptivity and knowledge (the uninterrupted path in the severing, the path of liberation with the severing done) is the general reading for every place in the whole treatise where the uninterrupted and the liberated are set side by side. That dharma knowledge and subsequent knowledge are established separately by the desire realm and the upper realms is the baseline for the three great ledgers of the second half of this fascicle — mutual objects, objects taken, and the cultivation at the several stages. The threefold gloss of the sixteen modes of apprehension is the model for how the whole treatise handles the gate of “one name with several senses”; and the breadth and narrowness of the three gates in “discernment extends to mode of apprehension, to that which apprehends, and to that which is apprehended” is this treatise’s standard model for the threefold division of entity, function, and object.
Two junctures are to be remembered. The conventional knowledge at the border of direct realization is cultivated in addition only at the three subsequent knowledges of suffering, origination, and cessation, and these three moments fall upon the sixteen minds of the path of seeing in the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble; the two tables must be read together. The intermixed cultivation of the meditative absorptions enters here only into the ledger of cultivating the knowledges, while its result (the cause of the five Pure Abodes) is not opened out until the Chapter on Absorption — this fascicle establishes only its number, not its result.
There is one further loose thread left to the reader. The conventional knowledge at the border of direct realization cultivated in the path of seeing is a dharma that will not arise; it has no occasion ever to become present. Since it cannot arise, upon what does its “acquisition” rest? The treatise cites the answer of the ancient master — by the force of the noble path this conventional knowledge is cultivated, and after emerging from the contemplation a superior conventional knowledge taking the truths as its object becomes present; because the support of its arising has been obtained, it is called obtaining that knowledge, as obtaining a gold ore is called obtaining gold. To obtain the ore is not to have gold in hand, but the ore is that upon which the gold depends. Many a merit “already obtained but not yet used” in practice stands beneath this simile.
佛不共法·共功德·六通The Dharmas Exclusive to a Buddha · Merits Held in Common · The Six Supernormal Knowledges
全文五層 →Full five layers →前一卷辯智之體,這一卷辯智所成之德。一開卷即「如是已辯諸智差別,智所成德今當顯示」,接著按『誰能得』由窄到寬排三段——唯佛的十八不共法、通聖的無諍願智無礙解、通凡的六通。全品亦盡於此卷。
一句話:這一卷不是在編一張神異目錄,是在替每一種功德建帳——體是什麼智、依什麼地、依什麼身、怎麼得;四問答完,功德才算立住,答不出來的一概不給『通』這個名。
三個眼目
-
『不共』不是別人全無,是別人不究竟。三念住那一節把話說死了——諸大聲聞也能於順違俱境離歡慼,仍名不共佛法,理由只有四個字:「并習斷故」。光記釋『力』的訓詞走的是同一條路:二乘不是無智,是「於境有礙」,所以不得名力。遇到本論的『唯佛』二字,第一問不是別人有沒有,是別人到不到底。 這一手本卷示範了三次。
-
所緣一問,同時決定體性、依地與智數。大悲何以唯俗智——因為要普緣一切有情、要作三苦行相,無漏智緣不到。詞無礙解何以唯依欲界初靜慮——因為上地無尋伺,沒有語言的運作。義無礙解何以十六智——因為『義』字取廣取狹有二途。遍趣行力與漏盡力的『或』字也是同一回事。問所緣,等於一次問完了體與地。
-
能被呪術仿冒的,不足以作判準。三示導之中教誡最尊,論給的第一條理由不是它最玄妙,而是前二導呪術也做得到——健馱梨能騰空、伊剎尼能知他心;唯有教誡除漏盡通外無可替代。第二條理由是前二導只令人暫時迴心,教誡則定引當來利樂。判一件事之尊卑,先問它可不可被冒充,再問它引來的是暫時還是究竟。
一義(附):通是慧,不是神異
六通一段八百八十字,是本卷唯一的長行專段,也是全卷四門格式用得最完整的地方。論從頭到尾沒有一句在描寫神通的效果,開口就是定盤星——「如是六通解脫道攝,慧為自性,如沙門果」,並釋「解脫道言顯出障義」。通是慧,而且是出障那一分的慧。
於是往下每一問都落在慧上:智攝(四通俗智、他心五智、漏盡如力)、依地(前五依四靜慮,不依無色,因無色觀減止增而通須止觀均地)、所緣(唯自地下地)、得法(未曾得者加行得,曾串習者離染得)、念住攝(前三身念住,他心三念住,宿住漏盡四念住)、三性(天眼耳無記,餘四唯善)。
末後正60、正61 又把這條線收緊一次:神境等五通雖有修、生、呪、藥、業五種來源,然而「除修所得,皆通善等」,且「非定果故不得通名」——不是定所生的果,嚴格說連『通』這個名都不該給。這一句是全卷對神異最冷靜的一次劃界。
通於全論
十力、四無畏所配的智數(十智、九智、八智、六智),全部要回到前一卷的十智才讀得懂;六通『依四靜慮』一句,要等下一品辯定才補得完整;三明所治的三際愚與『唯無學位』之限,承的是賢聖品。這一卷看似在說功德,實則是把前面六品所立的名相拿出來作一次總用場——凡讀到不明處,回頭去找那個名相最初被立的地方。
還有兩件事是這一卷留給讀者的線頭。其一,本卷兩處最堅實的對辯(宿住漏盡念住攝、天眼耳無記性)皆集中在六通段,其破者經三方逐字互證即是眾賢之語,而光記所標的『救云』二處未具名救者——並錄不判,不代判。其二,真諦舊譯此段作「分別慧品」而非「分別智品」,並於十力另立訓詞七義之科,比玄奘本細一層;二本義理無違,唯開合有異。
全卷從佛的十力起,收在地獄眾生初受生時那一點生得的他心與宿住上——「苦受逼已更無知義」。同是一個『知』字,其間的距離就是這一卷所辯的全部功德之量。
The preceding fascicle made out the entity of knowledge; this fascicle makes out the merits that knowledge accomplishes. It opens with “thus the differences of the several knowledges have been made out; the merits that knowledge accomplishes are now to be shown,” and then arranges three sections by who can obtain them, from narrow to wide — the eighteen dharmas exclusive to a Buddha, the non-contention, knowledge of aspiration, and unobstructed knowledges held in common with the noble ones, and the six supernormal knowledges held in common with ordinary beings. The whole chapter also ends with this fascicle.
In one sentence: This fascicle is not compiling a catalogue of marvels; it is opening an account for every merit — what knowledge is its entity, upon what level does it depend, upon what body does it depend, how is it obtained; only when these four questions are answered does a merit stand, and whatever cannot answer them is not given the name “supernormal knowledge” at all.
Three Points to Watch
-
“Not held in common” does not mean that others have none of it; it means that others do not reach the end of it. The section on the three foundations of mindfulness settles the matter outright — the great śrāvakas too can be free of delight and dejection amid the favorable, the adverse, and the mixed, and yet it is still called a dharma not held in common, and the reason is four words only: “because in the Buddha alone the residual habits are cut off as well.” Puguang, glossing the word “power,” travels the same road: it is not that the two vehicles have no knowledge, but that their knowledge is “obstructed with regard to its object,” and so it does not earn the name of power. When the two words “the Buddha alone” are met with in this treatise, the first question is not whether others have the thing, but whether others reach the bottom of it. This fascicle demonstrates the move three times.
-
One question about the object determines at once the entity, the level of dependence, and the count of knowledges. Why is great compassion conventional knowledge alone — because it must take all sentient beings for its object and must form the mode of apprehension of the three sufferings, and knowledge without outflows cannot reach them. Why does the unobstructed knowledge of speech depend upon the desire realm and the first meditative absorption alone — because the higher levels have neither applied nor sustained thought, and so no working machinery of language. Why does the unobstructed knowledge of meaning include sixteen knowledges — because the word “meaning” admits of two routes, one wide and one narrow. The word “or” in the power of the paths leading everywhere and in the power of the exhaustion of the outflows is the very same matter. To ask after the object is to have asked at one stroke after the entity and the level.
-
What can be counterfeited by spell-craft is not enough to serve as a criterion. Among the three guiding demonstrations the demonstration by instruction is the most honored, and the first reason the treatise gives is not that it is the most mysterious but that the former two can be done by spell-craft as well — Gandhārī can make one soar into the sky, Īkṣaṇī can make one know the minds of others; the demonstration by instruction alone has nothing that can replace it save the supernormal knowledge of the exhaustion of the outflows. The second reason is that the former two only turn a person’s mind for a while, whereas instruction assuredly draws forth benefit and ease to come. To judge whether a thing is high or low, first ask whether it can be counterfeited, and then ask whether what it draws forth is temporary or ultimate.
One Further Point (Appended): A Supernormal Knowledge Is Discernment, Not a Marvel
The one section on the six supernormal knowledges, eight hundred eighty characters long, is the sole extended prose passage of this fascicle, and also the place where the four-question format is used most completely. From beginning to end the treatise does not have one sentence describing the effects of supernormal power; it opens with the fixed pole-star — “these six supernormal knowledges are included in the path of liberation and have discernment for their own nature, like the fruits of the ascetic life” — and glosses it, “the words ‘path of liberation’ show the sense of issuing forth from obstruction.” A supernormal knowledge is discernment, and it is that portion of discernment which issues forth from obstruction.
Every question thereafter therefore falls upon discernment: what knowledges are included (four of them conventional knowledge, that of the minds of others five knowledges, that of the exhaustion of the outflows as with the power), the level of dependence (the first five depend upon the four meditative absorptions and not upon the formless, since in the formless observation decreases and stillness increases while a supernormal knowledge requires a level where stillness and observation are equal), the object (one’s own level and the levels below alone), how they are obtained (what has never been obtained by preparatory effort, what has been practiced through separation from defilement), inclusion in the foundations of mindfulness (the first three in the foundation of mindfulness of the body, that of the minds of others in three, those of former abodes and of the exhaustion of the outflows in four), and the three ethical qualities (the divine eye and the divine ear indeterminate, the other four wholesome alone).
At the end, Roots 60 and 61 draw the line tight once more: although the five supernormal knowledges beginning with that of the divine object-field have five sources — cultivation, birth, spell, drug, and action — still “apart from what is obtained by cultivation, all extend to the wholesome and the rest,” and “since they are not the result of absorption they do not obtain the name of supernormal knowledge” — what is not a result produced by absorption ought not, strictly speaking, to be given the name “supernormal knowledge” at all. This sentence is the coolest boundary this fascicle draws around the marvelous.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The counts of knowledges assigned to the ten powers and the four fearlessnesses (ten, nine, eight, six) can all be read only by going back to the ten knowledges of the preceding fascicle; the one sentence that the six supernormal knowledges “depend upon the four meditative absorptions” is completed only when the next chapter makes out absorption; and the folly regarding the three periods that the three clear knowings counteract, together with the restriction “in the stage beyond training alone,” are carried over from the chapter on the worthy and the noble. This fascicle seems to be speaking of merits, but is in fact putting to a single general use every technical term established in the preceding six chapters — wherever the reading is obscure, go back to the place where that term was first established.
Two further loose threads are left to the reader by this fascicle. First, the two firmest pieces of debate in this fascicle (whether the supernormal knowledges of former abodes and of the exhaustion of the outflows are included in the four foundations of mindfulness, and whether the divine eye and ear are of indeterminate nature) are both concentrated in the section on the six supernormal knowledges, and the refuter there, cross-evidenced word for word on three sides, is Saṅghabhadra; but the two places where Puguang marks “a rescuing objection says” do not name who is rescuing — recorded without adjudication, and not adjudicated on his behalf. Second, Paramārtha’s earlier translation gives this section as the “Chapter Analyzing Discernment” and not the “Chapter Analyzing Knowledge,” and sets up for the ten powers a further outline of seven senses of the gloss, one layer finer than Xuanzang’s; the two versions do not conflict in doctrine and differ only in how they divide and gather.
The whole fascicle begins from the ten powers of the Buddha and closes upon that one point of knowledge, obtained by birth, of the minds of others and of former abodes which beings in hell have when they first take birth — “once the feeling of suffering has pressed upon them, there is no further sense in which they know.” It is one and the same word “know,” and the distance between the two is the whole measure of the merits this fascicle makes out.
諸定·功德·正法住世The Absorptions · The Merits · The Abiding of the True Dharma in the World
全文五層 →Full five layers →前八品之末。賢聖品明果,智品明因,此品明緣——證果之智所依止的那個定。全品四段:所依諸定(四靜慮·四無色·八等至諸門·三種等持)、能依功德(四無量·八解脫·八勝處·十遍處·得依身·起定緣)、正法住世、造論宗旨。最後四首七言,論主闔上全書。
一句話:這一品不是在排定境的階梯,是在替『心被安住』這件事逐條算清它由哪幾件實法構成;算到最後一頁,論主放下法數,說能判法的人已經不在了,所以你該去修。
三個眼目
-
四層靜慮不是四樣東西,是同一件事被撤了三次支。體只有一個「心一境性」,界從支的加減來——具伺喜樂立為初,「漸離前支立二三四」。這個讀法一立,後面所有的表都成了同一條軸上的刻度。進階的動作一律是減,不是加。
-
十八個支名,只有十一件實事。全品最吃力的一段就在數這個數。初二靜慮的「樂」與第三靜慮的「樂」名同而體異——前者是輕安,後者才是樂受;「內等淨」聽起來是一個新法,其實就是信根。同一個名出現在兩處,先問它在兩處是不是同一件事——毘曇的實事表就是這樣一次次數出來的。
-
定越深越能斷惑,不成立。「無漏能斷惑,及諸淨近分」——根本的淨定三面堵死:斷不了下地(已離染)、斷不了自地(自所縛)、斷不了上地(以勝己故)。能斷的是無漏,或是站在『正要往上跨一步』那個位置上的近分。安坐在深定裡的人,正是不斷惑的那一種。
一義(附):味定為什麼要單獨立一格
八等至的前七各有三類——味、淨、無漏。味定是什麼?「謂愛相應,愛能味著故名為味」。它所貪著的東西很特定:不是別的,正是剛剛滅去的那一分淨定。「即味相應所味著境,此無間滅彼味定生」——所以同一剎那,就出定言是出了淨定,就入定言是入了味定。
這一格是全品後面所有門的前提。往下講初得、相生、緣境、斷惑,每一門都要先問一次『你說的是味、淨,還是無漏』;答案不同,結論完全不同。定修得越好,越容易落進這一格——這正是它被單獨立名的理由。
論在諸門之間還留了兩條互為反面的線索:根本地的善無色定「不緣下地諸有漏法」,而無色的近分卻非緣下地不可,「彼無間道必緣下故」。要斷下地的惑,就得回頭看下地。往上走的人不看下面,正要斷的人非看不可。
通於全論
品末的兩段,分量遠大於它們的字數。「前來分別種種法門,皆為弘持世尊正法」一句,古德有二解:一解以正宗分算到破我品,一解以正宗分止於定品而此句以下總名流通。依第二解,這一句就是全論流通分的起點。二解並存於古傳,古德自身並錄不判。
正法住世的答案不是年數,是條件——「有能受持及正說者」「有能依教正修行者」,「故隨三人住世時量,應知正法住爾所時」。千年之說是被引述的異說,古德明標「敘異說」。法住多久,繫於還有沒有那三種人。
最後四首七言。第一首自陳宗旨——「我多依彼釋對法,少有貶量為我失,判法正理在牟尼」:明知書中有異於毘婆沙處,卻不說『我對他錯』,而說過失在我,把判的位子留給世尊。後三首說世相——眼閉、證者散、無人能判、鄙劣的尋思攪亂聖教;煩惱如狂象而「無鉤制惑」;如來正法之壽「漸次淪亡如至喉」。
二者連讀,才見全論收筆的用意:能判的人已經不在了,所以你更該自己去修,而不是等一個判者出現。 末句「應求解脫勿放逸」不是套語,是這一整段推論的結論。三十卷法數至此,論主親手把讀者推出書外。
The end of the first eight chapters. The Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble explained the result, the Chapter on Knowledge the cause, and this chapter the condition — that absorption upon which the knowledge that realizes the result depends. The chapter has four sections: the absorptions relied upon (the four meditative absorptions · the four formless absorptions · the several gates of the eight attainments · the three concentrations), the merits that rely upon them (the four immeasurables · the eight liberations · the eight bases of mastery · the ten totalities · by what they are obtained and upon what body they arise · the conditions for arousing absorption), the abiding of the true Dharma in the world, and the purport of the treatise’s composition. With four last stanzas in seven-character lines, the author closes the whole book.
In one sentence: This chapter is not laying out a stairway of absorption-states; it is reckoning up, item by item, out of what real dharmas the fact that “the mind has been settled” is composed — and on the last page the author lays the dharma-numbers down and says that the one who could adjudicate the dharma is no longer here, and that you should therefore go and practice.
Three Points to Watch
-
The four stories of meditative absorption are not four things; they are one and the same thing from which three factors have been withdrawn. The entity is only one, “one-pointedness of mind upon a single object,” and the boundaries come from the adding and subtracting of factors — what possesses sustained thought, joy, and pleasure is established as the first, and thereafter “by degrees the preceding factors are left behind and the second, third, and fourth are established.” Once this reading is set up, every table that follows becomes a set of graduations on one and the same axis. The motion of advancing is always subtraction, never addition.
-
Eighteen names of factors, and only eleven real entities. The most laborious passage in the chapter is the one that counts this number. The “pleasure” of the first two meditative absorptions and the “pleasure” of the third are the same in name and different in entity — the former is pliancy, only the latter is the feeling of pleasure; “inner evenness and purity” sounds like a new dharma and is in fact just the faculty of confidence. When one and the same name turns up in two places, ask first whether in the two places it is one and the same thing — that is how an Abhidharma register of real entities gets counted out, one pass at a time.
-
That the deeper the absorption the better it can cut off the afflictions does not hold. “What is without outflows can cut off the afflictions, and so can the preliminary stages that are pure” — the basic pure absorptions are blocked on three sides: they cannot cut off the level below (its defilement is already left behind), cannot cut off their own level (they are bound by it), cannot cut off the level above (it surpasses them). What can cut off is what is without outflows, or what stands in the preliminary stage, at that position of “being just about to take one step upward.” The one sitting at ease deep within an absorption is precisely the one who is not cutting off the afflictions.
One Further Point (Appended): Why the Attainment of Savoring Has to Be Set Up in a Column of Its Own
Of the eight attainments the first seven have three kinds each — savoring, pure, and without outflows. What is the attainment of savoring? “That is, the one associated with craving; craving is able to savor, and hence the name savoring.” What it is greedy for is very particular: it is nothing else than that portion of the pure absorption which has just ceased. “The very object savored by what is associated with savoring — when this ceases with nothing intervening, that absorption of savoring arises” — so that in one and the same moment, spoken of as emerging, one has emerged from the pure absorption; spoken of as entering, one has entered the absorption of savoring.
This column is the presupposition of every gate that follows in the chapter. Below, in treating first obtaining, mutual production, the objects taken, and the cutting off of the afflictions, each gate must first ask once, “are you speaking of the savoring, the pure, or the one without outflows?”; the answers differ and the conclusions differ altogether. The better the absorption is cultivated, the more easily one falls into this column — and that is the very reason it is given a name of its own.
Among the several gates the treatise also leaves two clues that are the reverse of each other: the wholesome formless absorptions of the basic levels “do not take as object the dharmas with outflows of the levels below,” while the preliminary stages of the formless must take the level below as object, “since their uninterrupted path must take what is below as object.” To cut off the afflictions of the level below, one must look back at the level below. The one going upward does not look down; the one about to cut off has no choice but to look.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The two passages at the end of the chapter weigh far more than the number of their characters. Of the sentence “the various dharma-gates analyzed above are all for the sake of spreading and upholding the true Dharma of the World-Honored One,” the ancient masters have two explanations: one reckons the section of the main doctrine as far as the Chapter on Refuting the Self; the other stops the main doctrine at the Chapter on Absorption and takes everything from this sentence on as the section of dissemination. By the second explanation, this sentence is the starting point of the section of dissemination of the whole treatise. The two explanations stand together in the ancient transmission, and the ancient masters themselves record both without adjudicating.
The answer to how long the true Dharma abides is not a number of years but a condition — “there are those able to uphold it and to expound it rightly,” “there are those able to practice rightly according to the teaching,” and “hence, according to the measure of time that those three persons abide in the world, it should be known that the true Dharma abides just so long.” The account of a thousand years is a divergent account cited from elsewhere, and Puguang expressly marks it “setting out a divergent account.” How long the Dharma abides hangs upon whether those three kinds of person are still there.
Last, the four stanzas in seven-character lines. The first states the purport for himself — “I mostly follow them in explaining the Abhidharma; where there is any small disparagement, it is my own fault; the right principle for adjudicating the dharma rests in the Sage”: knowing full well that there are places in his book divergent from the Vaibhāṣikas, he does not say “I am right and they are wrong” but says that the fault is his, and leaves the seat of adjudication to the World-Honored One. The last three speak of the state of the world — the eye is closed, those who realize are scattered, no one can adjudicate, and mean speculation throws the holy teaching into confusion; the afflictions are like a maddened elephant, and “there is no hook to check delusion”; the lifespan of the Tathāgata’s true Dharma “sinks away by degrees, as though it had reached the throat.”
Read the two together, and the intent of the whole treatise’s closing appears: the one who could adjudicate is no longer here, and so you should all the more go and practice yourself, rather than wait for an adjudicator to appear. The last line, “one should seek liberation and not be heedless,” is not a formula of exhortation; it is the conclusion of this whole stretch of reasoning. At the end of thirty fascicles of dharma-numbers, the author with his own hand pushes the reader out of the book.
破執我Refutation of the Grasped Self
全文五層 →Full five layers →全論八品講『有哪些法』,講到極細;最後這一品只做一件事——在那一大堆法裡指出:沒有一個我。沒有本頌,通篇對辯,從犢子部一路破到數論勝論,末後三頌勸學而全書終。
一句話:這一品不是在證明『我不存在』,是在逐一拿掉「我」所能站的每一塊地——現量沒有它的位置,比量沒有它的差別可徵,經教沒有它的名分,記憶與業果也不需要它來擔保。
三個眼目
-
破我先破認知,不先破定義。 開卷不問『我是什麼』,只問『你憑什麼知道有它』——現量得不到,比量也沒有『有它則如此、無它則不然』的差別可徵。要緊的是論並不主張看不見的都不存在:五色根同樣看不見,論卻承認它有,因為缺緣則果不生、不缺則生,這差別是徵。論所遮的不是不可見,是不可徵。 這把尺可以一直用下去。
-
譬喻要拆,先問『像在哪一點』。 犢子部把整個宗建在「依薪立火」上,論主便整段整段地拆這一個喻——不否認它像,只要求先說定何者為火何者為薪;一旦定名,六層便依次落下:緣薪生火則火異薪,煖觸為火則俱時異體,依即俱生則自承體異,薪無火無而你不許……每一層都是先接受對方剛才的解釋,再看那解釋自己走到哪裡去。 這是全論最密的一段譬喻論證。
-
不記,是分析的結果,不是態度。 命者與身一異不記、世間常等四記不記、如來死後有等不記——理由一致:問題預設了一個立不住的主詞,任何答案都等於替它背書。龍軍答畢隣陀王,正是用『宮中本無菴羅樹,果味如何可答』把這一層說破。而不說「命者都無」又是另一重分寸:「無我」與『連假我也無』是兩句話,對機不同,說法便不同。
一義(附):無我之後,誰在記得,誰受業果
破完之後,論要回答兩個最實的問題。誰在記得?——不是異心憶異心,是同一相續之中,過去緣境之心引起今時能憶之識;而所謂『念的主人』,其實就是生念之因,因即名主,何必另立一個我。誰受業果?——不是從已壞之業生果,是從業的相續轉變差別而生,如種生果:接得上叫相續,前後有異叫轉變,最後一刻特別有力叫差別。
要看清的是:這兩個回答都沒有取消現象,只換掉了擔保人。 記憶還在,業果還在,只是擔保它們的不再是一個常住的我,而是一段有因果性的相續。全品的正面義理就在這裡,其餘皆是掃除。
通於全論
品首「虛妄我執所迷亂」一句,遙承界品「無漏謂聖道」以來全論對有漏無漏的分判——煩惱之根既在我執,則前八品所辨的一切法相,最後都要落到這一句上。破犢子部一段所用的實有假有之尺(別有事物是實·但有聚集是假),即是全論處理假法實法的通用尺;業果相續轉變差別一段,則是業品所立業果之理的最後收束——業品說業有多少種,此處說業何以能隔世生果。
末後三頌是全書的落點。「此涅槃宮一廣道,千聖所遊無我性」——無我不是一個結論,是一條路。而論主自言所說只是「方隅」,其用在「為開智者慧毒門」:毒入身則從一處遍全身,慧亦如此,從一門而遍入一切法。全論最後一個字是「業」,卻已不是輪迴之業,是遍悟所知之勝業。三十卷書至此而止。
The eight chapters of the whole treatise expound “which dharmas there are,” expounding them down to the finest grain; this last chapter does one thing only — it points out, within that whole great mass of dharmas, that there is no self. There are no root stanzas; from beginning to end it is disputation, refuting the Vātsīputrīyas and going on to the Sāṃkhya and the Vaiśeṣika, and at the last three stanzas exhorting to study, with which the whole book ends.
In one sentence: This chapter is not proving that “a self does not exist”; it is taking away, one by one, every piece of ground on which a “self” could stand — direct perception has no place for it, inference finds no difference by which it can be attested, the scriptural teaching gives it no standing, and neither memory nor the fruit of action needs it as guarantor.
Three Points to Watch
-
Refuting the self begins by refuting cognition, not by refuting a definition. The chapter opens not by asking “what is the self” but only “on what ground do you know that there is one” — direct perception cannot reach it, and inference finds in it no difference to be attested of the sort “if it is there, so; if it is not there, otherwise.” What matters is that the treatise does not maintain that whatever is invisible is nonexistent: the five form-faculties are equally invisible, and yet the treatise grants that they exist, because when a condition is lacking the result does not arise and when it is not lacking it does, and this difference is an attestation. What the treatise blocks is not the invisible but the unattestable. This measure can be used all the way down.
-
A simile must be taken apart, and the first question is “in what respect is it alike?” The Vātsīputrīyas build their whole tenet upon “establishing fire in dependence on firewood,” and the author accordingly takes this one simile apart passage by passage — not denying that it is alike, but requiring first that it be settled which is the fire and which the firewood; and once the naming is fixed, six layers fall in order: since fire arises in dependence on firewood, fire differs from firewood; if the warm touch is the fire, they are simultaneous and of different entities; if “dependence” means co-arising, then difference of entity is admitted outright; where there is no firewood there is no fire, and yet you do not allow this… Each layer first accepts the explanation the opponent has just given, and then looks to see where that explanation carries itself. This is the densest stretch of argument from simile in the whole treatise.
-
Not declaring is the outcome of analysis, not an attitude. That the life-principle is or is not the same as the body is not declared; the four declarations about the world being permanent and the rest are not declared; whether the Tathāgata exists after death and the rest is not declared — and the reason is one and the same: the question presupposes a subject that cannot stand, and any answer whatever amounts to endorsing it. The Venerable Nāgasena’s answer to King Pilinda makes just this point with “there never was a mango tree in the palace, so how could the taste of its fruit be answered for.” And that he does not say “there is no life-principle at all” is a further nicety of measure: “there is no self” and “not even a conventional self” are two different sentences, and where the hearers differ, the teaching differs.
One Further Point (Appended): After No-Self, Who Remembers and Who Undergoes the Fruit of Action
Once the refutation is done, the treatise must answer the two most concrete questions. Who remembers? — it is not one mind remembering what a different mind saw; it is that within one and the same continuum a past mind that took that object as its object gives rise to the present consciousness that remembers; and as for “the owner of the recollection,” that is simply the cause that produces the recollection, and the cause is what is called the owner — why set up a self besides? Who undergoes the fruit of action? — the fruit is not produced from an action already perished, but from the transforming and differentiating of the continuum of action, as a fruit is produced from a seed: that it joins up is called continuum, that before and after differ is called transformation, that the last moment has a special force is called differentiation.
What is to be seen clearly is this: neither answer cancels the phenomenon; each only replaces the guarantor. Memory remains, the fruit of action remains; only what guarantees them is no longer a permanent self but a stretch of continuum possessed of causality. The positive doctrine of the whole chapter lies just here; all the rest is clearing away.
Bearing on the Treatise as a Whole
The sentence at the head of the chapter, “because they are deluded by the false grasping of a self,” reaches back to the adjudication of the with-outflows and the without-outflows that the whole treatise has carried on since “without outflows means the noble path” in the Chapter on the Elements — the root of the afflictions lying in the grasping of a self, all the marks of dharmas distinguished in the preceding eight chapters must in the end come down to this one sentence. The measure of real existence and conventional existence used in refuting the Vātsīputrīyas — that to have a separate thing is real, that to be merely an aggregation is conventional — is the measure the whole treatise uses in handling conventional and real dharmas; and the passage on the continuum, transformation, and differentiation of action and its fruit is the final gathering-up of the principle of action and fruit established in the Chapter on Action — that chapter says how many kinds of action there are, and this passage says how action can produce a fruit across a lifetime.
The last three stanzas are where the whole book comes to rest. “This is the one broad road to the palace of nirvāṇa, the nature of no-self on which a thousand noble ones travel” — no-self is not a conclusion but a road. And the author says of himself that what he has spoken is only “a corner,” whose use is “to open for the wise the poison-gate of discernment”: as poison entering the body spreads from one place through the whole of it, so does discernment, entering by one gate and pervading all dharmas. The last word of the whole treatise is “work,” yet it is no longer the work of transmigration but the surpassing work of comprehending all that is knowable. Thirty fascicles of book come here to their end.